You are on page 1of 358

Routed Systems: Getting Started

46204-050000-5000A

March 1, 2005

© Copyright 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THESE MATERIALS AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC. BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc. reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3ds max, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC-X, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, backdraft, Biped, bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), cleaner, Codec Central, combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, IntroDV, lustre, Mechanical Desktop, ObjectARX, Physique, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint, RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, VISION*, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), burn, Buzzsaw.com, CAiCE, Cinestream, Civil 3D, cleaner central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWFit, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, toxik, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Co. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
HTML Help © 1995-2002 Microsoft Corp. All rights reserved. Internet Explorer © 1995-2001 Microsoft Corp. All rights reserved. Windows® NetMeeting® © 1996-2001 Microsoft Corp. All rights reserved. TList™ 5 Active X control, Bennet-Tec Information Systems. Typefaces © 1992 Bitstream typeface library. All rights reserved. Visual Basic® and Visual Basic logo (graphic only) © 1987-2001 Microsoft Corp. All rights reserved.

Third Party Copyright Notices
2D DCM, CDM, and HLM are trademarks of D-Cubed Ltd. 2D DCM © D-Cubed Ltd. 1989-2004. CDM © D-Cubed Ltd. 1999-2004. HLM © D-Cubed Ltd. 1996-2004. ACIS® © 1989-2002 Spatial Corp. All rights reserved. Portions © 2002-2004 Autodesk, Inc. COPRA MetalBender © 1989-2002 data M Software GmbH. All rights reserved. dBASE is a registered trademark of Ksoft, Inc. Intel® Math Kernel Library, © 1999-2003 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. ISOGEN © 1999 Alias Limited Industrial Software Products. MD5C.C - RSA Data Security, Inc., MD5 message-digest algorithm © 1991-1992 Objective Grid © 2002 Stingray Software, a division of Rogue Wave Software, Inc. All rights reserved. RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved. SafeCast™ © 1996-2002 and FLEXlm™ © 1988-2002 Macrovision Corp. All rights reserved. SMLib © 1998-2003 IntegrityWare, Inc., GeomWare, Inc., and Solid Modeling Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Typefaces © 1996 Payne Loving Trust. All rights reserved. uuencode/uudecode © 1983 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Wise for Windows Installer © 2002 Wise Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions of this software © 1981-2003 Microsoft Corp. Portions of this software © 1992-2002 ITI. TList ActiveX™ control licensed from Bennet-Tec Information Systems. This software contains Macromedia Flash Player software by Macromedia, Inc., © 1995-2002 Macromedia, Inc. All rights reserved. Macromedia and Flash are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Macromedia, Inc. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

GOVERNMENT USE Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U. S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1
Chapter 1

Tubes and Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Getting Started with Tube & Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
About Tube & Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tube & Pipe Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tube & Pipe Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Tube & Pipe Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Workflow for Tube and Pipe Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Working in Autodesk Inventor Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Understanding Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Backing Up Tutorial Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting Up Projects For Exercises. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Create a Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Add Individual Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Specify the Update and Bill of Materials Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Setting Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
About Tube and Pipe Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Setting Style Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting Style Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Working with Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Create Rigid Pipe with Fittings Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Create Tubing with Bends Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Modify Existing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Delete Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Contents

|

iii

Change Styles for Existing Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Change Active Styles for New Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Adding Styles to Assembly Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Chapter 3

Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
About Rigid Routes and Runs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Rigid Route Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Understanding Rigid Route Node Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Tool Elements for Pipe Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Tool Elements for Tube Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Change the Tool Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Define Angular Position and Rotation Snap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Define 45-degree Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Define Bent Tubes at Any Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Enter Precise Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Route Cycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Creating Routes Automatically and Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Create Semi-automatic Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Manually Create Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Create Pipe Routes with Custom Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Populate Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Create Bent Tube Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Chapter 4

Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
About Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Workflow for Flexible Hose Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 About Styles for Flexible Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Flexible Hose Style Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Structure Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Creating Flexible Hose Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Creating Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Create a Hose Route with Both Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Populate Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Change Nominal Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Delete Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Create a Hose Route With One Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Editing Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Hose Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Hose Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Start Fitting and End Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Bend Radius Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

iv

|

Contents

Chapter 5

Authoring and Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
About Content Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 About Content Center Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Configuring Content Center Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Access the Content Center Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Create a New Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 View Source Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Access the Tube & Pipe Authoring Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Author Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Prepare iParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Author iParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Publishing to Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Publish Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Publish Authored Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Creating Styles Using Published Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Placing Tube and Pipe Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Insert Library Parts Using I-drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Place Fittings in the Active Project Work Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Replace Existing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Chapter 6

Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
About Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Editing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Controlling Individual Display and Update Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Node Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Add to Finished Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Insert Intermediate Node Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Update Manual Route Points Dynamically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Delete Node Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Change Node Point Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Route Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Adjust Fitting Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Adjust Node Point Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Restore a Default Fitting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Replace Existing Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Turn Off Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Delete Fitting Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Connect Fittings and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Contents

|

v

Editing Bent Tube Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Deleting Routes and Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Chapter 7

Documenting Routes and Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
About Documenting Routes and Runs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 General Workflow for Documenting Pipe Runs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Using Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Preparing Design View Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Create New Design Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Creating Drawing Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Create Base Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Create Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Create Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Recovering Route Centerlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Dimensioning Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Creating Parts Lists and Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Parts Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Part 2
Chapter 8

Cable and Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Getting Started with Cable and Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
About Cable and Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Understanding Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Backing Up Tutorial Data Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Setting Up Projects For Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Working in Autodesk Inventor Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 About Electrical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Workflow for Electrical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Creating Electrical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Place Pins and Define Pin-level Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Set Part Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Add RefDes Placeholders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Modifying Pinned Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Delete Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Adding Custom Properties to Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Placing Electrical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

vi

|

Contents

Chapter 9

Working With Harness Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
About Working in Harness Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Cable and Harness Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Creating Harness Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Workflow for Harness Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Using the Cable and Harness Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Setting Properties for Harness Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Customize Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Set Occurrence Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Assign Occurrence Reference Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Chapter 10

Working with the Cable and Harness Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
About the Cable and Harness Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Locating the Cable and Harness Library File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Using the Cable and Harness Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Adding Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Create New Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Modifying Library Wire and Cable Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Copy Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Edit Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Delete Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Add Properties to Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Importing and Exporting Wire Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Import Into the Cable and Harness Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Export Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Practicing Your Skills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Chapter 11

Working with Wires and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
About Wires and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Inserting Wires and Cables Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Insert Wires Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Insert Cables Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Moving Wires and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Moving Wires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Moving Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Deleting Wires and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Deleting Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Removing Cables and Cable Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Replacing Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Importing Wire Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Configuration File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Comma Separated Value Data File Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Contents

|

vii

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Setting Occurrence Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Selecting Work Points for Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Chapter 12 Working with Segments .272 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Override Library-level Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Setting Segment Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Adding Shape to Wires and Cable Wires . . . . . . . .236 Redefine and Move Wire Points . . . . . . .270 Unroute Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Wire Occurrence Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Insert Segment Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Setting Segment Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Creating Segments .266 Route Wires . . .254 Redefine or Move Segment Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 View Wire and Cable Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Setting Diameter Behavior in Segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Delete Harness Segment Work Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 About Routing and Unrouting .269 Unroute Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 About Segments .272 viii | Contents . . . . . . . . . .253 Manipulating Segments . . . . . . . . . . .269 Unrouting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Apply Offset Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Defining Semi-automatic Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Unroute All Wires or Cables from All Segments . . . . . . . . . .237 Delete Wire Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Defining Automatic Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Add Segment Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Cable Occurrence Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Changing Displays of Segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Changing Wire and Cable Displays . . . . . . . .257 Delete Harness Segments .246 Define Segments . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Defining Manual Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Restore Library-Level Properties . . . . . . .247 Plan Segment Start Points and Endpoints . . . . .261 Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Add Wire Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Nailboard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Use Sample Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Create Part and Wire Bills of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Insert a Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Edit Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Modifying Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Nailboard Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Delete Splices . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Control Length for Splices . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Formatting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Move the Harness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 About Generating Reports. . . . . . . . . . . 286 Using the Report Generator Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Contents | ix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Change Fan State and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 About Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Arrange the Harness Segments. 286 Workflow for Harness Reports . . . . . . . . . . 306 Arrange the Wire Stubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 The Nailboard Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 14 Working with Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Chapter 15 Generating Reports . . 302 Creating a Nailboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 About Nailboards and Drawings . . . . 290 Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Access Properties for Splices and Splice Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Set Display Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Change Segment and Wire Line Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Changing Nailboard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Recommended Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Redefine the Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Creating Splices . . . 277 Splice Wires or Add Wires to the Splice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Create Wire Run List Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Create Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Manipulating the Harness. . . . . . . . . . . 283 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Splice Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Adding Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Using the IDF Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Add Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Printing Nailboards and Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Understanding Import IDF Options . .Annotating the Nailboard Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Practice your skills. . . . .318 Create an Assembly Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 About the IDF Translator . . . . . . . . . . 339 x | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Add Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Importing IDF Board Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Using IDF Board Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Part 3 Chapter 17 IDF Translator. .312 Dimension the Nailboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Exchanging Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

This add-in to the Autodesk Inventor assembly environment provides the capability to create complete tube and pipe systems in mechanical assembly designs. 1 .Part 1 Tubes and Pipes Part 1 of this manual presents the getting started information for Autodesk Inventor® Professional Tube and Pipe.

2 | .

It also provides information about the tube and pipe environment.Getting Started with Tube & Pipe In This Chapter 1 This chapter provides basic information to help you get started using Autodesk Inventor® Professional Tube & Pipe and the exercises in this manual. ■ Introduction ■ Tube and pipe environment ■ General workflow ■ Working in Autodesk Inventor installations ■ Understanding prerequisites ■ Backing up the tutorial files ■ Exercise setup ■ Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly 3 . how to get started with a tube and pipe assembly. and how to use tube and pipe data.

pipe. Move pipe runs rigidly and edit hose routes in positional representations. Create derived routes and edit the underlying base sketch. Create tube. adding runs and routes to mechanical assemblies or product designs. When a tube and pipe assembly is complete. Use the browser to edit tube and pipe runs and to change visibility for routes. and components. the tube and pipe information can be represented in drawings and presentations. Define tube and pipe styles that conform to industry standards. pipe run. Recover the route centerlines in tube and pipe drawings.About Tube & Pipe Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe provides features for setting tube and pipe styles. and individual routes. Access and use the Content Center to place conduit parts and fittings in tube and pipe assemblies. Tube & Pipe Features With the tube and pipe tools you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create tube and pipe assembly files. Use the bill of materials to document routes and runs. 4 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . adding initial fittings to create route branches. Populate selected routes with library components. Author custom tube and pipe iParts and standard parts for publishing to the Content Center Library. Defer updates on automatic routing for the tube and pipe runs assembly. or hose routes. Modify both routes and runs. Fittings can be used to initiate route branches. runs. and populating selected routes. Save tube and pipe data to ISOGEN .pcf files or ASCII bend tables. and output to different data formats.

When you open an assembly in Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe.Tube & Pipe Environment Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe provides the familiar Autodesk Inventor assembly environment in addition to design tools for adding routes and runs. and panel bars are enabled. a tool appears on the Assembly panel bar for adding piping runs to your design. Main menu Standard toolbar Tube & Pipe panel bar Browser toolbar Model browser About Tube & Pipe | 5 . The following image shows the application window that is displayed once a piping run is added to a new assembly file. Tube & Pipe-specific tools are added to the standard toolbar. Once you add your first run. the tools specific to creating tube and pipe runs in an assembly are displayed. Model browser.

The components include individual runs and their associated routes. Content Center Favorites.The features added by the Tube & Pipe environment include: Tube & Pipe panel bar The tool set for the tube and pipe run environment. double-clicking an existing route. Enables switching between the Model browser. The main run acts as a container for all routes and runs and the components created or placed in the routed system. Each run contains an Origin folder. and right-clicking a route and selecting Edit. Browser toolbar Model browser Route panel bar Standard toolbar Part Features panel bar Tube & Pipe Browser All tube and pipe components added to an assembly are contained in the main runs subassembly. Use the panel bar title to switch between the Tube & Pipe and Assembly panel bars. (Not displayed) The tool set when the tube and pipe route environment is active. and Representations. fittings. You must activate the tube and pipe run environment to access the Tube & Pipe panel bar. segments. such as the Display/Update Settings tool and the Active Style list. one or more routes. Contains the content of the tube and pipe assembly in a hierarchy. along with the main Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. (Not displayed) Contains the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool to author tube and pipe iParts and normal parts for publishing to the Content Center Library. such as creating new routes in a pipe run. Contains several Tube & Pipe-specific tools in addition to the standard Autodesk Inventor tools. There are several ways to enter the route environment. 6 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . and route node points. and any segments or fittings that are populated or manually inserted.

rigid piping. You can then create the first pipe run and begin adding bent tubing. and flexible hose routes. tube and pipe runs subassembly pipe run loose fittings rigid pipe route pipe segment bent tube route tube segment flexible hose subassembly flexible hose route hose segment Workflow for Tube and Pipe Assemblies The first step in creating a tube and pipe system is to open an assembly file. About Tube & Pipe | 7 .Routes contain the designated node points. The following image shows a browser with possible tube and pipe components. The assembly file can be empty or contain an assembly model.

2 Create the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly.To create a tube and pipe runs assembly 1 Open an Autodesk Inventor assembly file. and then create a new route using displayed tools to guide your selections. but the component cannot be edited. and segments. Determine interferences with tube and pipe components in populated routes by selecting the entire tube and pipe runs subassembly in the browser. create positional representations that contain the tube and pipe runs subassembly. Turn visibility off to completely hide the Tube & Pipe Runs component in the graphics window. 5 Adjust the route to design changes. ■ ■ ■ 8 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . 10 Document the tube and pipe assembly in a drawing. Fittings can be used to initiate new routes. This means that the outline of the tube and pipe component is visible through Autodesk Inventor. and replace fittings. Create detailed drawings of populated routes within any file. pipe. Working in Autodesk Inventor Installations If Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe is not installed on the system viewing the tube and pipe data. View the outline of tube and pipe run data within the context of an open assembly file. 6 Populate the route or insert additional fittings into the tube and pipe assembly or directly onto a route. Change the active style or add. 8 Make final adjustments to each route and run. or hose style. the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly and all that it contains is read-only. When the Tube & Pipe add-in is not installed. 9 Populate selected route(s). the tasks you can perform with the tube and pipe data include: ■ ■ Open a Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. remove. and new tube and pipe components cannot be added. reposition. 3 Use the Tube & Pipe Styles tool to set style options. 7 Add additional routes and runs. 4 Select a tube. or save the file in a different format such as ISOGEN or bend table. node points.

If you do not.Understanding Prerequisites It is assumed that you have a working knowledge of the Autodesk Inventor interface and tools. Create. the files are located in the installation path of Autodesk Inventor Professional. by default. or if you would like to repeat an exercise. constrain. You can revert to these files if you make any mistakes during the exercises. It is also recommended that you have a working knowledge of Microsoft® Windows NT® 4. C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional (version)\Tube & Pipe\Tutorial Files. Edit a component in place. To back up the tutorial files 1 Go to the Tube & Pipe directory and create a new folder called Exercise_Backup. and drawing environments. you use files that contain the example geometry or parts for that task. 2 From within the Tutorial Files directory. For Tube & Pipe. and a working knowledge of concepts for routing tube and pipe through mechanical assembly designs. back up the files so the originals are always available. and manipulate work points and work features.0. copy the exercise data into your new folder. Understanding Prerequisites | 9 . Keep any files you create for an exercise in the Tutorial Files directory to avoid the possibility of file resolution problems. Before you begin the exercises. use the integrated Design Support System (DSS) for access to online documentation and tutorials. Set color styles. or Windows® XP. part modeling. you should understand how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Use the assembly. Windows® 2000. and complete the exercises in the Autodesk Inventor Getting Started manual. At a minimum. These files are included in the Tutorial Files directory for the application. and browsers. sketch. Backing Up Tutorial Data Files For each exercise in this section. Now you can use the files in the Tutorial Files directory as you work through the exercises in this book.

The CC folder is under the root path of the project work space. select Edit. 6 Ensure the project is active. For the first pipe run added. Each run can include one or more individual routes.ipj as the active project and click Open. the assembly environment is displayed and you can begin adding pipe runs. and then enter CC. All routes in a run can use the same or different styles. expand the Folders Options. With the capability to assign unique styles. To set up the project for Tube & Pipe exercises 1 On the File menu. the system creates the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly along with an individual run. 4 Optionally. and then browse to Tutorial Files directory. click Save. 10 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe .Setting Up Projects For Exercises For the exercises. The Tube & Pipe Runs assembly is a container for all pipe runs added to the assembly. double-click the project. right-click Use Styles Library. You can specify any other location you need to store the Content Center Library content. browse to and select the project file in the Tutorial Files directory. Routes can start and end on assembly model geometry or an initial fitting dropped on the route to create a branch or fork. You can also use the default Content Center Files location. in the Edit Project pane. and then select Yes or Read Only. The number of runs you include depends on your design and manufacturing documentation needs. it is possible to have all three route types. If it is not. each with different size diameters in a single run. 3 Optionally. 7 Click Done. Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly When an assembly file is first opened in Autodesk Inventor Professional. click Browse. 2 In the Open dialog box. right-click Content Center Files. 5 When completing all settings for the project. click Projects. Select the AirSystemAssy.

and is saved to the workspace of the active project. and the standard toolbar. see Autodesk Inventor Professional Help site map.Create a Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly To create the tube and pipe run assembly. you click the Create Pipe Run tool on the Assembly panel bar. You also become familiar with the components included in the tube and pipe design environment including the Tube & Pipe panel bar. Preparation section. For more information. Create Pipe Run tool The Tube & Pipe Runs assembly is named automatically. The Tube & Pipe Runs assembly is added to the browser along with other placed components and is arranged in the order it was added to the assembly. the Model browser.<13-digit number>. The tube and pipe run environment and the individual run are activated. Individual runs are arranged in the order they are added to the tube and pipe assembly. In the Create Tube & Pipe Run dialog box that appears you provide a unique name and location for the individual run contained in the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly. The file can be renamed through the Design Assistant tool.iam. you open an existing assembly and prepare to add tubing and piping in the context of that assembly. You can name and locate each run file as it is added. Add Individual Runs Each time you use the Create Pipe Run tool after the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly is created. Tube and Pipe. NOTE The file name schema for library parts can also be customized. an individual run is added to this container run. Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly | 11 . By default. In the following exercise. the file is named pirun.

<13-digit number>. 4 In the Create Tube & Pipe Run dialog box. as shown in the following image. The run is saved using the name and location indicated in the dialog box. The system adds the tube and pipe run subassembly to the Model browser and activates the tools in the Tube & Pipe panel bar. The tube and pipe run is automatically named and saved to the project workspace. Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional (version)\Tube & Pipe\Tutorial Files\pirun. click the Create Pipe Run tool.iam assembly.To create a tube and pipe assembly 1 On the File menu. enter the name for the first run: New File Name: Air_System1 New File Location: Verify the default path is in the workspace of the project. St s yl e R t rd r te pu da ut en an ts O e St n t e tC N et e Fit at ec sh en ul GE re p o n am ce nn nt f p r O a R e om Pa Pl Po Co Co IS C e ut Ro g tin t Fi t gs in rs be Tu & pe Pi te ou ew N 12 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . 3 On the Assembly panel bar. 5 Click OK. click Open. 2 Open the AirSystemAssy.

and the Active Style list. The Help system provides information about every feature in the Autodesk Inventor Professional modules as well as the standard Autodesk Inventor features. the Display/Update Settings tool for tube and pipe defer updates. Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly | 13 .6 Locate the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly in the browser hierarchy. 8 Click Help ➤ Help topics from the menu to access Help. and then scroll to the Autodesk Inventor Professional section. The individual run is automatically added and activated so you can begin defining a route and adding components. Tube & Pipe runs assembly individual run 7 Examine the standard toolbar to see the New Route tool.

Tube and Pipe Help 10 Close the Help window.9 Click the link to Tube and Pipe to display and examine the Tube and Pipe Help home page. Specify the Update and Bill of Materials Behavior In the Model browser. 11 Activate the top-level assembly and save the file. 14 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . activate Tube & Pipe Runs in a tube and pipe assembly to specify the update behavior and to indicate which bill of materials version to use for the entire tube and pipe runs assembly. The following image displays the Tube & Pipe Settings dialog box in which you can specify these settings. You can then click Site Map to list the entire Autodesk Inventor Professional Help.

you can defer updates for individual runs and individual routes. When the Defer All Tube & Pipe Updates check box is cleared. Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly | 15 . 3 In the Tube & Pipe Settings dialog box. For detailed instructions. To specify the setting for defer all tube and pipe updates 1 In the AirSystemAssy. The tube and pipe runs assembly is not visible. see “Controlling Individual Display and Update Settings” on page 132.iam assembly. Neither the tube and pipe runs assembly nor the associated parts in drawings automatically update. You cannot create new pipe routes and runs in the tube and pipe runs assembly. 4 Click OK. most commands specific to Tube & Pipe are disabled. 2 Right-click Tube & Pipe Runs.Defer All Tube & Pipe Updates Defer all tube and pipe updates when you are editing normal parts in a standard Autodesk Inventor assembly or editing positional representations. and select Tube & Pipe Settings. ensure the Defer All Tube & Pipe Updates check box is cleared. activate the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. You can view automatic responses to edits on the tube and pipe assembly. After the Defer All Tube & Pipe Updates check box is selected.

Even if two pipes had the same part number. The BOMs mainly differ in how they store the raw material description for library parts: ■ In the current BOM. so the Use R9 Bill of Materials check box is cleared by default. You had control over the merging of rows in the parts list. parts do not merge. you could choose not to merge them. ■ In the following exercises you use the current version of Autodesk Inventor Professional to create tube and pipe assemblies. you can specify whether to continue using the R9 BOM (default) or to use the current BOM. When you migrate R9 or earlier tube and pipe drawings.Use of Bill of Materials The drawing manager uses the current bill of materials (BOM) to create tube and pipe drawings in the current version of Autodesk Inventor Professional. the raw material description for conduit parts was stored in the part number property. Drawings and Representations section. see the Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help. All BOM items with the same part number are automatically merged in parts lists. the raw material description for conduit parts is stored in the new stock number property. In the R9 BOM. If the part number is blank. NOTE For more information about how to migrate legacy tube and pipe drawings to the current version. 16 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe .

how to modify and change them. how to set them.Setting Styles In This Chapter 2 Tube and pipe styles describe the characteristics for tube. pipe. This chapter provides basic information about the available options. and how to add them to a template. and hose routes. ■ Introduction ■ Style options ■ Setting styles ■ Modifying styles ■ Changing the active style ■ Deleting styles ■ Adding styles to a templates 17 . These styles are key to controlling the design of the routed system as it evolves from prototype to manufacturing.

They are used to ensure consistent application of tube and pipe components. To correctly define new materials for tube and pipe styles. 18 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . see “Setting Up Projects For Exercises” on page 10. such as if you select fittings that do not have compatible end treatments. unrelated entities. you are specifying the conduit part and fittings from the Content Center Library that make up the pipe run and establishing rules to be followed during routing. For detailed instructions. route direction. create your own style based on one of them. conduit parts and fittings in a pipe run often have certain requirements for size. While the Tube & Pipe Styles tool allows styles to be defined in this way. There is a list of system-supplied tube and pipe styles in Autodesk Inventor Professional. or create your own style based on published conduit parts and fittings.About Tube and Pipe Styles Tube and pipe styles affect most aspects of route design from route creation and editing to populating the route. you can set these requirements once. and then apply them to the design. When defining a style. you must enable the Use Styles Library setting for your project. NOTE It is possible to define a style with which you are unable to create a route. For example. You can use one of these styles. NOTE Do not confuse tube and pipe styles with styles and style libraries in Autodesk Inventor. You can also make changes to existing styles. With tube and pipe styles. They are two separate. routes cannot be created using such a style. and materials.

Setting Style Parameters | 19 . The Tube & Pipe Styles tool can be accessed from: ■ ■ ■ ■ The Tube & Pipe panel bar The Route panel bar The Assembly panel bar (when a tube and pipe runs assembly is active) The context menu in the graphics window or Model browser (right-click) Existing styles are also available from the Active Style list on the standard toolbar. active pipe run. Tube & Pipe Styles tool When you click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. start the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. The following is the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box displays settings for the style definition for the entire tube and pipe runs assembly. or active route.Setting Style Parameters Before you begin working with routes and runs. and then select the style you need. activate the tube and pipe run environment. To edit styles. and then click each tab on the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box to review and modify the settings. examine the style settings. depending on your tube and pipe environment.

All routes using the selected style are updated with these changes. The Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box is divided into five tabs. Flexible Hose creates a route consisting of a single hose segment that can connect up to two fittings. industry standard. It can be thought of as a filter. material. but also the fittings from which you can choose. Tubing with Bends. couplings. General On the General tab you set the general characteristics of how routes are created. and Flexible Hose. Certain selections drive not only the available nominal diameter values. Saves all changes to the selected style. Route Type Sets the type of route to create. and elbows) to use when populating a rigid route. Sets the color for solid piping components. Clicking Apply performs the same action.The following tabs and tools are available on the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box: General Sets general options for how routes are created including the route type. Sets the default fittings (pipe. the default bend radius for Tubing with Bend styles. or sets the hose part. 20 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . The parameters on each tab are described in this section. Creates a custom style using the selected style as a base. Removes the selected style from the list. Size Rules Display Fittings New button Save button Delete button Setting Style Options The Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box reflects the settings for the active style. Determines the length of conduit segments in the routed system. Available route types include Rigid Pipe with Fittings. and the round up value for Flexible Hose styles. Specifies the diameter for route segments. start and end fittings to populate a flexible hose route. Rigid Pipe with Fittings creates a series of straight pipe segments connected with specified fittings. Tubing with Bends creates a single route with bends instead of fittings at the directional change points. and allowed route directions.

the system returns all content for that setting. For example. By default. The standards and materials of published parts are listed. settings include 90 and 45 degree directions. For Rigid Pipe with Fittings styles. rigid pipe with fittings tubing with bends Flexible Hose Pipe and Fittings Sets the material and industry standard for conduit parts and fittings. directions of 90 degrees are always included for rigid styles. the system allows all (*/any) materials to appear in the results. When an asterisk is displayed. Route Direction Setting Style Options | 21 . you can select 45 or 90 degree angles when manually placing nodes. Use the lists to make your selections. Sets the directions allowed for the directional change points (elbows or bends) on a rigid type route. When both options are selected.An example of each is shown in the following image.

22 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . to use for conduit parts and fittings in routes and runs. in which you may need to specify the hose part. Within the Library Browser dialog box. start fitting. For flexible hose routes. The following image shows the Fitting tab for the Flexible Hose style. schedule number. For bent tube routes. ■ ■ The Nominal type sets the nominal diameter value and schedule number to use. Display The Display tab sets the color in which all tube and pipe components are displayed. The OD/ID type sets the outside and inside diameters for the segments. Note that couplings are not required for flanged or welded styles. as well as the increment round-off value. Fittings The Fittings tab sets the standard conduit parts and fittings to populate routes and runs. and end fitting. They depend on the criteria selected on the General tab. the parts available for selection are filtered from the Content Center Library based on the style criteria set on the General and Rules tabs. you can set a hose length round-up value and minimum bend radius.Size The Size tab sets the diameter and possibly. Rules The Rules tab sets parameters that specify the size range for creating route segments between identified route points. It includes the minimum and maximum values. you can set the default bend radius for the bends.

and provides access to the list of all defined styles. Once you create the new style. Before creating a new style. Working with Styles | 23 . it becomes the active style. modify and delete existing styles.For flexible hose styles. change the active style. click the New button. They are not created automatically. select an existing style on which to base the new one. and apply a new style to an active route. with the exception of changing between rigid and flexible hose styles. It can be created in a flat structure. you can set the Use subassembly option to determine how the flexible hose route is structured. Style list The Style list is available from every tab of the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. Change the style for the active route. Once you create a flexible hose route. author necessary conduit parts and fittings and publish them to the Content Center Library. To create a new style. For detailed instructions about authoring and publishing. With styles you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ Set style defaults for all new routes you create. or with route components grouped in a subassembly under the pipe run (default). All new routes are created based on the displayed active style. styles can be created at any time and style changes can be applied to new and existing routes throughout the design process. see “Authoring and Publishing” on page 89. Change the active style for the tube and pipe assembly. the route structure cannot be changed. Modify settings for all routes that use the same style. new delete save Working with Styles Although it is best to set styles before creating routes or placing fittings. set the style settings you want. Once custom parts are authored and published. define the new style to match the properties of published parts. To create a style using published conduit parts and fittings for the new style must first exist in the Content Center Library. and then provide a unique name. It displays the active style or the style used by the active route or run. You can use this list to create new styles.

set the nominal diameter to 1/4 in. 7 Click Save. enter Threaded Steel Pipe with Iron Fittings (1/2 ND. 24 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . When you switch between styles or create new styles during edits. 11 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar.Create Rigid Pipe with Fittings Styles In this exercise. 10 In the New Style Name dialog box.ASTM A53/A53M . 5 In the New Style Name dialog box. click Apply. The Welded Steel Pipe . Click No to proceed without saving changes to the current style. 3 In the Style list. 6 On the Size tab. To create rigid piping styles 1 With the AirSystemAssy.ASME B16.11 Welded Steel Pipe as the basis for the new style. the style you just edited is the active style for forward route creation. By default. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. and click OK. the changes are applied to the route.iam assembly open.ASTM A53/A53M . 8 Specify the following to define the second style: Style: ISO 7598/ISO 49 Threaded Steel Pipe with Iron Fittings Route Direction: Clear the 45 degrees check box Click New. and click OK. NOTE Saving edits at this point would save the changes to the ISO 7598/ISO 49 style rather than creating a new style. 4 Click New. you create two new rigid piping styles using existing styles as the base. 9 Click No when asked to save edits. select ASTM A53/A53M . activate Pipe Run 1. If a route is active when Save is used. Click Yes to save edits to the current style before proceeding.ASME B16. you are prompted whether or not to save edits.ASME B16.11 (1/4 ND). enter Welded Steel Pipe .11 (1/4 ND) style is displayed in the list as the new default. 90 Only).

you modify the Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND. To create a Tubing with Bends type style 1 In the Style list. and click OK. provide a name. 4 Specify the following settings: Rules tab: Default bend radius: 0.. Piping Component Color list.5 Bend). For example. In this exercise..5 Bend) style you created by changing the piping component color back to As Material.5 Bend) is selected in the Active Style list. verify that Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND. select ASTM B 88-ASME B16. 3 In the New Style Name dialog box. you create a new Tubing with Bends type style. You can select the system style from the list and make the modifications. and then click OK. NOTE Before you make changes to a system style. 7 On the standard toolbar. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool.22 Soldered Copper Tubing as the base for the new style. 6 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. to modify a system style. click New. click OK.500 Display tab: Piping Component Color: Black Chrome 5 Click Save. 3 On the Display tab. select As Material. The change is saved with the style. The style change is also applied to any route currently using that style. The modified style is the new active style for any routes that are created.. Modify Existing Styles You can modify any of the available style definitions including those that are provided with the system. To modify style definitions 1 On the Tube and Pipe panel bar. enter Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND. and then click OK to close the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. 2 In the Style list.Create Tubing with Bends Style In this exercise. select the style.5 Bend). 2 Click New. make a copy and give it a new name. select Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND.. 4 Click Save. Working with Styles | 25 .

The model is updated to conform to the new style. You cannot switch an existing route between the rigid piping and flexible hose styles. you can make subtle or dramatic changes quickly and efficiently. 2 On the standard toolbar. NOTE When switching a route from a Tubing with Bends style to a Rigid Pipe with Fittings style. Change Styles for Existing Routes Design needs change as the routed system evolves. 5 In the Style list. To delete a style 1 Click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. then switch to the actual. If a style is used by any route. 3 Click Delete. it cannot be deleted. the results may be unpredictable. it is common to create routed systems using less expensive manufacturing methods at the early design stages. For example. Active Style list. 4 When Autodesk Inventor Professional prompts you to confirm.Delete Styles Styles you no longer use can be removed. The changes are also reflected in the browser. With styles. To change the style of an existing route 1 Activate the route for which you want to change the style. verify that the style is removed. select the style to remove. click OK. 6 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. more expensive manufacturing methods at the end. 2 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. click Yes. select a new style. 26 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles .

When you install Autodesk Inventor Professional. To accommodate these changes. As with Autodesk Inventor assembly templates. Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe provides two types of units for the template: English and Metric. For example.ASME B16. if you set English (Inches) as the default unit of measurement during installation. the template in the English subdirectory is copied to the Templates directory. select Welded Steel Pipe . Adding Styles to Assembly Templates Within an Inventor assembly. your selection of default units of measurement sets the default template used to create standard Inventor assemblies and the default template used to create tube and pipe runs subassemblies. you can select a new style with the settings needed for each different route. the style change or edits will affect all routes that use that style. by default. If you change or edit a style that is in use by one or more routes. the tube and pipe runs subassembly is created from the tube and pipe runs assembly template that is stored in the installation path of Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe. Active Style list.ASTM A53/A53M .Change Active Styles for New Routes Routes in the same system often have different uses and different requirements. Adding Styles to Assembly Templates | 27 . To change the active style for new routes 1 Activate the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly or an individual pipe run.11 (1/4 ND). 2 On the standard toolbar. C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Tube & Pipe\ Templates.

4 Activate the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. add this file to a blank assembly to be used as a template. click the Create Pipe Run tool. Occurrence tab. 2 On the Assembly panel bar. To reuse them in future tube and pipe assemblies. 7 On the Assembly panel bar. 10 Activate the top-level assembly. save the assembly file. 11 In the Model browser. and then select Properties. click OK to save the file using the defaults. 13 Save the top-level assembly file and everything it contains. In the Create Tube and Pipe Runs dialog box. they are saved in the main piping runs assembly that you name and locate when you first start your tube and pipe assembly. 9 Right-click and select Finish Edit. 14 Close Autodesk Inventor Professional. While in the Properties dialog box.When you customize a set of tube and pipe styles. empty assembly file. 5 In the browser. right-click Pipe Run 1. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. and select Delete Run. 6 When Autodesk Inventor Professional prompts you to confirm. 28 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . 12 In the Properties dialog box. clear the Adaptive check box. Save the changes and then click OK to close the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. 8 Create new styles and modify existing styles as required. and then close the Properties dialog box. note the name and location of the assembly file listed on the General tab. 3 When prompted. The main tube and pipe runs assembly is automatically named and located. click OK. Once added to the template your styles can be used in other tube and pipe assemblies. and Pipe Run 1 is activated. right-click Tube & Pipe Runs. To add custom styles to an assembly template 1 Create a new.

iam. Adding Styles to Assembly Templates | 29 . 16 Navigate to the Tube & Pipe Templates directory where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional. Note that the template in the Templates directory or subdirectories cannot be directly edited. NOTE When saving the new template in the Templates directory. copy the assembly file noted in Step 12.iam. rename the file to backup piping runs. 17 Make a backup of piping runs.iam file. 18 Paste the new template to the Templates directory in Step 16 and rename it to piping runs. The default installation location is C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Autodesk Inventor Professional (version)\Tube & Pipe\Templates.15 Using Microsoft® Windows or an alternate method. it is recommended that you also save the new template file in the appropriate English or Metric subdirectory depending on the unit of the new template. This directory contains the piping runs.iam. For example.

30 .

Creating Rigid Routes and Runs In This Chapter 3 Rigid routes are defined by selected node points. In this chapter. you learn about routes and runs and the methods and tools for creating automatic and semiautomatic routes. A populated route is created based on the tube and pipe style and the defined route path through the assembly. The rigid route styles. ■ Routes and runs ■ Route basics ■ Understanding route node points ■ Using the 3D Orthogonal Route tool ■ Creating routes automatically and manually 31 . and populating selected routes with library components. Couplings connect straight segments and elbows or bends connect each directional change point. contain the rules for conduit parts and elbows. manually adding route node points. Rigid Pipe with Fittings and Tubing with Bends.

use the New Route tool on the Tube & Pipe panel bar or standard toolbar. you can cycle through the solutions and select the one that best fits your needs.About Rigid Routes and Runs A run is a collection of one or more routes with the same or unique styles that work together to make up a complete flow system. you must activate an individual pipe run. A route is the path that determines the shape of the flow system within the assembly and the intelligent placement of library components for the run along that path. To provide more control over route direction. the Route panel bar displays and you can begin creating a path for your route. bent tubes. To enter the route environment. Other routes branch off a primary route to create a network of interconnecting rigid pipes. the system automatically generates the needed segments and route node points. New Route tool In Route mode. Fittings from the Content Center Library can be dropped onto routes or completed runs to initiate new routes or to add needed features. and then enter the route environment. to highlight valid points and to guide your selections. and flexible hoses required to represent a single flow system. Click the Route tool to add new routes or continue existing ones. Route tool 32 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . If more than one routing solution exists based on the points selected. Rigid Route Basics To start creating routes. you can also use the Point Snap and Rotation Snap tools. Some routes contained in a run start and end on the assembly model geometry. you can populate it with the Content Center Library content. You can create a route by connecting two or more points and directing the route through circular openings and around existing geometry in its path. Once you have a route. Tools are provided as you select points. The run follows styles previously set and the path defined by the route. As you make your selections.

allow the system to automatically create route node points whenever possible. Work points and vertices in parts or assemblies. The auto-hide option is enabled by default. Valid route start points include: ■ ■ Center points on any circular feature such as a face. you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ Identify the circular geometry (or work points) that are used as the start and end points. Part tab.Create a route by selecting two or more points. If using in-line work features. Analyze where directional change points are needed to route through or around existing geometry. Autodesk Inventor Professional gives you visual feedback about what is happening in the graphics window and text messages on the status bar. You can define your routes as close to the appropriate results as possible. The messages change based on what is selected and the action you are performing. Define route node points manually where it is critical for a route to adapt to changes in the assembly or to control the direction of the route around existing assembly geometry. Rigid Route Basics | 33 . When deciding on the design of your route. Create in-line work features. In-line work features are hidden as soon as they are consumed by a feature. or you can develop them using precise distances and angles as you go. consider simplifying the route display by selecting the Auto-hide in-line features option on the Tools menu. to guide the route path. Application Options. including circular geometry on library parts. and then adjust them later. As you select points for a route. To speed creation and plan for dynamic editing and updating. a hole. Decide which points must adapt to changes in the model. such as a work point at the intersection of work planes. and cylindrical cuts.

For example. face. the system creates any needed route node points between the selected model geometry. Points highlighted with a green dot on the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. By default. other elements of the 3D Orthogonal Route tool appear at the selected point. With the line extender you can select points that are offset from a selected edge. To better control the direction of a route. If the model geometry changes. the route remains associative to these points. When the 3D Orthogonal Route tool first appears. or work plane. route node points can be added. the points you created are fixed. When you select circular geometry or work points. Valid point selections are controlled by styles. Once you select a point along the line. You can also manually define route points. Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool The 3D Orthogonal Route tool appears as soon as you begin selecting route points in the graphics window. or other adjustments to the route. work axis. deletions. the connection geometry. The elements displayed are dependent on what is selected. and set styles. only the line extender is displayed. the route automatically updates. It contains several elements that guide selection of valid route node points. Vertex points on any assembly component. and the action being performed. or deleted. Points snapped from an edge. Some elements are common to both styles. Once a route is finished. repositioned.Understanding Rigid Route Node Points When a rigid route is automatically generated. Snapped points are not associated to the original locating geometry. System-generated route points are not fixed and can automatically update to changes made to the route during editing. you can select any number of route node points between the specified start and end points. Valid selections for intermediate node points include: ■ ■ ■ ■ All valid start point types. 34 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . Manually defined route points are defined by selecting a point in the graphics window or by typing in an exact value. connection data. the 3D Orthogonal Route tool includes different elements depending on whether you are creating a pipe route with fittings or a tube route with bends. and do not move during dynamic edits.

Changes direction in 45-degree increments. you can define a work point on the axis direction from referenced geometry. green. This is available only when 45-degree route direction is set for the active style. you can rotate the direction axis to an orientation from referenced geometry. Shows the rotation possibilities for the next route point and enables the free rotation. you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ Rotate freely around the local axis. The size of the tool can be increased if the line is not long enough. Together with the Rotation Snap tool.Valid points. Click the line to add a node in that direction. Select points offset from selected edges. Together with the Point Snap tool. are highlighted with a green dot as you move the cursor over the lines in the tool. Direction axis (red. Rotation arrows 45-degree angle control Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool | 35 . those that will make a connection of the allowable length. Tool Elements for Pipe Routing When a rigid piping style is active and all elements are displayed on the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. and blue lines) 45-degree angle control rotation arrow The different elements in the 3D Orthogonal Route tool for rigid pipes with fittings include: Direction axes Shows valid direction for the next route point. Points that do not fall within the range set by the style criteria are displayed as a yellow x. Create points from referenced geometry. Change direction in 90 or 45-degree increments.

you can also: ■ ■ ■ Change direction at any angle between 0 and 180 degrees. 6 Click Save to apply color changes immediately. radius arrows rotation arrows Change the Tool Display Both tool color and size can be changed. click Styles Editor. you can select any assembly in the Tube & Pipe ➤ Samples directory. Change the bend radius using the radius arrows. Make precise adjustments to the included angle using the rotation arrows. To adjust the colors in which the direction axes. set the colors as you would other color format styles. colors become effective when you click Done to close the dialog box. or tooltip are displayed. To set colors in the display of the 3D Orthogonal Route tool 1 Open a tube and pipe assembly file containing at least one route. 4 In the Styles and Standards Editor dialog box. Tool size is changed using the plus (+) or minus (-) keys on the keypad. 5 Set the appropriate color attributes. and minus (-) to reduce it. 36 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . and select points offset from selected edges. and rotation arrows display along with the elements specific to creating bent tube runs.Tool Elements for Tube Routing When a Tubing with Bends style type is active the line extender. Otherwise. 2 Activate the top-level assembly or Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. For example. create points from referenced geometry. In addition to the ability to rotate freely around the local axis. such as the Tank or Cooling Tower. direction axes. line extender. expand Color in the left pane and select a Route_UI_Tool_(toolname) color style. 3 On the Format menu. Use plus (+) to increase the size.

To snap the rotation in 90-degree increments. To rotate freely around the axis. and then again when editing and repositioning routes and fittings. The tool also snaps to edge or face geometry. Release the cursor in the new location. The tool snaps to all four quadrant border angles as you rotate. click on a line of the Direction Axis. click and drag the Rotation Arrow as needed.Define Angular Position and Rotation Snap The rotation arrows and direction axes can be displayed when defining routes and placing fittings. Click and drag a rotation arrow. In this case. you can view the rotation possibilities for the current selection. With the Rotation Arrows and Direction Axes displayed. Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool | 37 . a dashed line and preview point show how the snap is applied.

select a point on the line to create a segment at the new angular position. When you are satisfied with the position. When it is displayed.Define 45-degree Angles When the 45-degree route direction is set in the active style. To use the Angle Control. Click an arrow to direct the path to the angle you want. angle control The route path changes to the new angular position. click the single arrow displayed on the selected axis to revert to the previous angular position. click the arrow pointing in the angular position you need. you can rotate the route position in 45-degree increments. the Angle Control can be displayed in the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. new position 38 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . If you select the wrong direction.

new position at 60 degrees Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool | 39 . Modeling tab. the Rotation Handles are displayed on the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. and drag to the required position.Define Bent Tubes at Any Angle When a tubing with bends style is active. To use the Rotation Handles click the arrow pointing in the angular position you need. This value is set on the Tools ➤ Document Settings. When they are displayed you can create a bend at any angle. you can also create a series of bends to achieve a compound bend. Using the Rotation Handles. The route path changes to the new angular position. rotation handles When you are satisfied with the new position. select a point on the line to create a segment at the new location. The tool snaps in regular increments based on the 3D Angle Snap value.

or work points. The dashed line represents the snap point in relation to the highlighted geometry. When the preview point is displayed at the needed location. A dashed line shows the point snapped from the face. click the selected geometry and the point is created. 40 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . you can define points by snapping to other model geometry. Click the face to create the route point at the intersection with the tool. a dashed line and preview point are displayed at the intersection of the line and the plane of the highlighted edge or face. Pause your cursor over faces. edges.Using Point Snap to Define Points When the 3D Orthogonal Route tool is active and Point Snap is checked in the context menu.

you can also enter a precise bend radius. rotation arrows. For tubing with bends styles. To enter an exact distance. Enter the value for the angle. Enter exact distances while your cursor pauses over the rotation arrows. start typing the value while your cursor pauses over the direction axis of the 3D Orthogonal Route tool.Enter Precise Values Although all route points can be selected interactively. You can also rightclick and select Enter Distance to enter a value. start typing the needed value while your cursor pauses over a rotation arrow or bent tube rotation arrow. The values entered are the distance or angle from the active position to the current node. If a point was snapped onto a line of the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. sometimes exact values are needed to create the required route. To enter an angle. or direction axes of the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. Entering angles is very similar. You can also right-click and select Enter Angle to enter an angle. You can enter precise values for both angles and distances. the value entered is the distance from the snap point to the desired node to add. Enter the value for the distance. you are prompted to reenter the value. The entered values must comply with set rules for segment length. otherwise. Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool | 41 .

All subsequent bends use the default radius set in the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. pause your cursor over the radius arrow. The new radius affects only the next bend. Click the tool to enter a different value for the bend radius. You can also start typing the new value while your cursor pauses over the radius arrow. 42 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs .To view the current bend radius.

Route Cycling If more than one valid solution exists for a route based on the selected points. Click the middle green button to make your selection. the Select Other tool cycles through the solutions in each section before advancing to the next section. Route Cycling | 43 . If there are multiple auto-route solutions in a single route. The length and segment information is included in a tooltip as you consider the available solutions. the Select Other tool is displayed. solution 1 solution 2 Solutions are evaluated and prioritized based on length and number of segments. Click the arrows to cycle through available solutions.

ASTM A53/A53M . A pipe route is added to the active run and activated in place.iam assembly. 2 On the Standard toolbar. To create a semi-automatic route 1 In the AirSystemAssy. 5 In the graphics window. pause the cursor over the circular geometry as shown in the following image.11 (1/4 ND) is selected. activate Pipe Run 1. 4 On the Route panel bar. you quickly define a route by selecting points using circular geometry and allowing the system to generate the rest. the circular geometry is highlighted and the line extender is displayed. start point 44 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs .Creating Routes Automatically and Manually Use tube and pipe styles you previously created and the skills you just learned to create tube and pipe routes in a tube and pipe assembly. click the Active Style tool to verify that Welded Steel Pipe . click the Route tool. Zoom in and use the Select Other Direction tool if needed to make your selection. click the New Route tool. Create Semi-automatic Routes In this exercise.ASME B16. Once preselected. 3 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. The line extender shows the direction of the route so you can create valid points along the line. Press the spacebar to change the direction of the line extender if needed. The Route panel bar is displayed.

This point is associated with the component that contains the selected circular edge. press the spacebar or use the Select Other tool.6 Click the circular geometry to select it as the start point. Make sure the line is pointing to the approach direction of the route. pause the cursor over the left arc of the IBeam opening. NOTE To flip the direction of a displayed axis. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 45 . A work point is added to the piping route. 8 Click the geometry to select it as the second point. 7 For the second route point. you can select a point on the line extender or existing geometry. To route through the IBeam. Rotate and zoom in to view the arc.

click the green middle button to select the first solution. Click the green middle button to select the first solution. 46 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . select the final location on the valve. When the selector tool appears. the route is generated to that point and the Select Other tool appears indicating that multiple solutions exist. 9 Click the arrows to cycle through the solutions. 10 To complete the route.As soon as you make your selection.

only the third or fourth solutions are valid. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 47 . NOTE To provide optimal flexibility for node placement. click the Route tool. Since the next node directs the route through the IBeam. 12 To continue routing. 13 Select the left arc of the IBeam opening as shown in Step 7. the first two solutions are valid only when the final node selection stops at the IBeam. the route tool provides all possible solutions for each node selection. and then click Work Point 1.An error message is displayed stating that the fitting cannot be placed because it is too big for the adjacent pipes. Use the Select Other tool to advance to and select the following solution. click OK to close the error message. Note that Work Point 1 still exists in the route as you can see in the graphics window or Model browser. In this case. and then click Undo on the standard toolbar. 11 To remove the last selection and complete the route using a valid solution. 14 Select the final location on the valve as shown previously in Step 10.

ASME B16. Manual points can. you create a second route in the same run. These manual points can be edited directly. In this exercise.ASTM A53/A53M .11 (1/4 ND) style you created earlier. and then you select manual route points below the IBeam using the 3D Orthogonal Route tool to change directions and otherwise guide your selections. using the Welded Steel Pipe . 48 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . be designated as auto route (unfixed) nodes during editing. which requires the creation of additional route node points. Manually Create Routes Many runs involve more complex routing. The system automatically creates the route above the IBeam.15 Click the green middle button on the selector tool to select the first solution. 16 Right-click and select Done. however. You create this route at the opposite end of the IBeam. but remain fixed when the system recalculates the route due to other modifications. 17 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

and then select Done. and select Fixed. 4 In the graphics window. right-click.iam assembly. click the green middle button on the Select Other tool to select the first selection. and then select the New Route tool. right-click. 6 Right-click the node point as shown in the following image. 2 In the graphics window or Model browser. node point Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 49 .To create a route manually 1 In the AirSystemAssy. activate Pipe Run 1. 3 On the Route panel bar. select the first two points. This time. click the Route tool. 5 To extend the point through the IBeam.

and then select Point Snap. enter a distance of 2. and then select Edit Position. end node 8 Right-click in the graphics window. 50 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . since the new point is an arbitrary point in space. and the 3D Orthogonal Route tool is displayed again at the new point. all directions are enabled and selectable.25 inches for the next point. When the dashed line shows the snap point. This time. 9 Rotate your view to look at the front of the assembly. except backwards. The point is created on the screen. The point is created on the screen. Pause the cursor over the segment in the first route as shown in the following image. click to create the route point at the intersection with the tool. 10 Right-click the point you just created. and then click the green check mark. 11 Pause the cursor over the line extender. and then click the Route tool to continue the route.7 Right-click the last node point in the route.

13 Rotate your view to look at the front of the assembly. The system is ready for your next selection. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 51 .12 Rotate your view to see the newly-constructed point and the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. angle control tool The tool rotates to the available angular position (45 or 90 degrees) in the selected direction. Click the 45-degree Angle Control tool to change the angular position.

16 Right-click in the graphics window to ensure that Point Snap is checked (on) on the context menu.14 Move the cursor along the 45-degree line. A dashed line representing the snap point is displayed from the cursor to the preview point. click Enter to select the point. 52 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . 15 For the next point. A preview point is displayed at the intersection of the line and the axis.5 inches. right-click it. click the 45-degree Angle Control so that the direction axis is parallel to the valve part as shown in the following image. 17 When the lines appear. and then click the line when the tooltip reads approximately 3. and then choose Select Other Snap. The route is generated to that point. Highlight the circular edge in the first valve.

click the circular geometry. 19 Right-click and select Done.18 For the last point. 20 Right-click and select Finish Edit. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 53 .

To add a custom bend. change the active style. use the Custom Bend option in the right-click context menu while creating a pipe route. You also use the 3D Orthogonal Route tool to create additional points. Try 2.5 or a similar value. 54 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs .Practice Your Skills Use the skills you just learned to create a third route in Pipe Run 1. you add a second run. and then create a route that is offset from the circular edge. ■ ■ ■ Select the first three route node points as you did for Pipe Route 2. The 3D Orthogonal Route tool changes to include the tube routing tools so you can create a bend with the radius and angle you need. You can create multiple custom bends in any given route. such as the elbows. In this exercise. third route Create Pipe Routes with Custom Bends Rigid pipe routes with fittings may require a custom bend to satisfy special manufacturing situations. Try snapping to existing geometry. The results should look similar to the following image when you are finished. The angled segment distance must be smaller than in the previous run. including custom bends.

enter a distance of 1 inch.iam assembly. click the New Route tool. or browse to \Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Tube & Pipe\Tutorial Files Pipe Run 2 is added after Pipe Run 1 in the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly and activated in place. and then click the line. 2 Set the Active Style to Threaded Steel Pipe with Iron Fittings (1/2. You can also type 8. 4 On the Route panel bar.5 inches. click the Route tool. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 55 . 3 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. 5 Pause the cursor over the circular edge as shown in the following image.5 inches when your cursor pauses over the line extender. 90 Only). add a new pipe run with the following name and location: New File Name: Air_System2.iam New File Location: Enter the path. The point is created offset from the circular edge by that distance. You can enlarge or reduce the 3D Orthogonal Route tool by pressing plus (Shift and +) and minus (-) on the keypad.To add custom bends 1 In the AirSystemAssy. 6 Move the cursor along the line extender until the tooltip reads approximately 8. and then click the green check mark. 7 Enlarge the 3D Orthogonal Route tool until the line reaches the top of the model.

The 3D Orthogonal Route tool now displays the tube routing elements. planar face on the geometry for Point Snap 9 Right-click in the graphics window. and then enter a distance of 5 inches. and select Custom Bend. 10 Click the Rotation handles and drag in the direction shown until the tooltip displays an angle of 30 degrees. 56 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . 11 Pause the cursor over the red axis. and then move the cursor over the work plane to snap the point onto the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. Click to create the point.8 Make sure Point Snap is on.

The 3D Orthogonal Route tool reverts to displaying the pipe routing elements. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 57 . 12 Right-click. and then enter a distance of 5 inches. and then select Custom Bend. 13 Pause the cursor over the red axis. as shown in the following image. Add a bend of 60 degrees in the other direction.

Tube and pipe information is treated like other parts and subassemblies and can be detailed using normal drawing manager methods and tools. Populate Route tool To populate routes in a run. 17 Right-click and select Finish Edit. A route starts with a defined path. which you can populate with library components to complete the route. Routes are populated using the styles you set. Populate Routes A populated route is a solid. You can i-drop fittings to the populated or unpopulated using the Content Center tool. three-dimensional representation of the pipes and fittings.14 Right-click. routes must be populated before being saved to the ISOGEN or bending machine formats. 15 Pause the cursor over the red axis. You can document both populated and unpopulated routes. 16 Right-click and select Done. select the Populate Route tool. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . select Custom Bend. rather than custom elbows. and enter 8 inches. Each time a route is populated all segments and fittings created are added to the Pipe Run folder. The linear segments adjacent to the custom bend sequence are joined with the bend to create a single pipe segment with bends. and then create a bend of 30 degrees as shown in the following image. However.

click the Populate Route tool. and then click OK. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 59 . activate Pipe Run 2. and then click the Populate Route tool on the Tube & Pipe panel bar.iam assembly open. 3 Right-click and select Finish Edit.To populate one or multiple routes 1 With the AirSystemAssy. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. 4 Activate Pipe Run 1. you populate all routes in the pipe run. 5 In the Populate Route(s) dialog box. The route is automatically populated with segments and couplings based on the active style and the defined route. right-click the route in the Model browser. select the check boxes for the routes you need to populate. NOTE To populate a single route in a pipe run. you can also activate the pipe run. 6 Right-click and select Finish Edit. In this exercise. and then select the Populate Route tool.

5 Bend). 3 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. 4 On the Route panel bar.Create Bent Tube Routes Bent tube type routes can be created at any angle and using any bend radius.5 Bend) style you created earlier. activate Pipe Run 2. For this exercise you select the Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND. 7 Click the Radius handle and enter a bend radius of 1 inch.iam assembly. click the Route tool. The 3D Orthogonal Route tool is displayed with the tube routing elements. and then create a bent tube route by directing it along the IBeam and over to the threaded steel route to the right of the model. 5 Select the start point of the route. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . Active Style list. click the New Route tool. 2 On the standard toolbar. select Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND. To create a bent tube route 1 In the AirSystemAssy... start point 6 Enter a distance of 5 inches for the first segment.

and then drag down 140 degrees. 10 Select the Rotation handle. 11 Pause the cursor over the red axis.8 Rotate to get a better view of the tool. and then enter a distance of 3 inches. and then enter a distance of 3 inches. and then drag up by 30 degrees. select the Rotation handle. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 61 . 9 Pause the cursor over the red axis.

and then enter 50 degrees.12 Click and drag the rotation handle 15 degrees to the right. Click the Rotation handles. 13 Rotate the view to look at the front of the model. and then create two segments of 5 inches along the red axis. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs .

and then enter a distance of 5 inches along the red axis. and then enter a distance of 21 inches for the next node point. 15 Enter a bend radius of 2 inches. click and drag the rotation handles up by 40 degrees.14 Pause the cursor over the red axis. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 63 .

16 Right-click and select Done. 17 Right-click and select Finish Edit. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . 18 Populate the tube route.

They are defined by placing fittings and hose nodes that determine the shape and appearance of the route in the assembly. and delete the routes. The flexible hose style controls which fittings are used and the structure of the flexible hose in the assembly. and then use the styles to create flexible hose routes both in a flat structure and in a subassembly structure.Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes In This Chapter 4 Flexible hose routes in a tube and pipe assembly are commonly used in machine construction to transmit dynamic power. you learn how to create a flexible hose style. You also learn to populate. such as hydraulic and pneumatic power. edit. ■ Introduction ■ Setting flexible hose styles ■ Creating flexible hose routes ■ Editing flexible hose routes 65 . In this chapter.

delete. and add fittings. you can insert intermediate node points in the hose route as you create it. 66 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . a preview line appears between the selected points to help you visualize the route. a hose segment. By modifying the applied style. As you make your selections. To provide more control over hose shape. Flexible hose routes can also consist of only the hose. Flexible hose routes can be created between standard assembly geometry or initiated from fittings dropped onto existing routes to create a branch. you can also replace. and an end fitting. with both fittings suppressed. and change nominal diameters. or a hose with one fitting suppressed. Once a route is populated you can delete and move segment node points. The start fitting and end fitting for a flexible hose must have two connection points.About Flexible Hose Routes Flexible hose routes can contain up to three parts: a start fitting. You can also move the start and end fittings and check the route for bend radius violations.

and then add optional intermediate hose nodes. add optional intermediate hose nodes. ■ No fittings (both are suppressed). ■ About Flexible Hose Routes | 67 . indicating the route structure and fittings to use. connect the start fitting first. 4 Create a flexible hose route to connect the geometry or fittings in the tube and pipe assembly. select the start geometry or component. and then select the end geometry or component. 6 Optionally. and then select the end geometry or component. If the route contains: Both start and end fittings. add optional intermediate hose nodes. 7 Finish the edit and populate the route.Workflow for Flexible Hose Routes The workflow for creating a flexible hose route is as follows: To create a flexible hose route 1 Create a tube and pipe assembly. 5 The workflow differs depending on the hose fitting definition that is specified in the flexible hose style. drop fittings on appropriate pipe segments or assembly geometry to use as the start or end connection points for hose routes. 2 Optionally. NOTE You can also start and end the hose route from any existing compatible geometry or component. ■ A start fitting. connect the start fitting and end fitting. edit hose nodes and hose length. 3 Define and select a flexible hose style.

You can create your own flexible hose style using custom fittings published to the Content Center Library or select a predefined style. NOTE You cannot apply a rigid type style to an existing flexible hose route and vice versa. Determines the structure of the hose as either a flat structure or a subassembly. based on the specified increment. For example.About Styles for Flexible Hoses As with rigid route types.. 68 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . (on the Fittings tab) Includes a hose part. one of the first things you must do before creating a route is to select a flexible hose style using the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. you must delete the route and create a new one using the flexible hose style. a start fitting. If you suppress the start fitting. is rounded up to 1. the hose length of 1. and an end fitting. The start and end fittings can be suppressed. Once the style is saved. Flexible Hose Style Parameters A flexible hose style includes several parameters that are common to all three route types. see “Setting Style Options” on page 20.5 in. if the Hose Round Up Value is set to 0. the end fitting is automatically suppressed. To change between a rigid style and flexible hose style. Fitting Types Suppress fitting Use subassembly For more information about parameters. it becomes the active style for new hose routes. The parameters specific to a flexible hose style include: Hose Round Up Value (on the Rules tab) Rounds the hose length up to the first larger value. Determines whether the selected fitting is included in the flexible hose route.4 in.5 in.

assembled. All parts are grouped into a subassembly under the pipe run. Flat structure All parts are independent components placed along with all other components under the pipe run. There is no subassembly.Structure Flexible Hose Routes When defining the flexible hose style you must decide if you want the fittings placed into either a flat structure or a subassembly. and represented in manufacturing documentation such as Parts Lists and Bills of Materials (BOM). Subassembly structure flat subassembly The route structure used for your design is typically determined by how the hose route parts are purchased. About Styles for Flexible Hoses | 69 .

Click Yes. 3 In the Style list.Female Thread . 5 Enter the new style name. To create a Flexible Hose style with both fittings 1 In the AirSystemAssy. To create a Flexible Hose style with start fitting only 1 Create another style based on Hydraulic Hose .iam assembly. and click OK. 6 Click Save and then click OK. is selected in the Nominal Diameter list.125 inch is selected as the Hose Round Up value.Swivel (1/2 ND 1). 3 On the Rules tab. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. 5 Select Suppress Fitting. is selected in the Nominal Diameter list. 6 Click Save.Female Thread .Female Thread . you are prompted that the end fitting will also be suppressed.Swivel. 5 Select Suppress Fitting. ensure .Female Thread .Female Thread . If the end fitting is not suppressed. The default fitting name is listed below it. 7 On the Rules tab. 2 On the Size tab.Swivel (1/2 ND 2) to indicate the nominal size and two hose fittings. select End Fitting from the Fitting Types list.125 inch is selected as the Hose Round Up value. you create several hose styles based on the predefined Hydraulic Hose . select Start Fitting from the Fitting Types list.Swivel and save it as Hydraulic Hose. ensure .Swivel (1/2 ND 0). 2 On the Size tab. To create a new Flexible Hose type style with no fittings 1 Create a third style based on Hydraulic Hose . is selected in the Nominal Diameter list.Creating Flexible Hose Styles In the following exercises.Swivel and save it as Hydraulic Hose. 4 On the Fittings tab. ensure . 4 On the Fittings tab.Female Thread . select Hydraulic Hose . ensure 1/2 in. activate Pipe Run 2.Female Thread . Hydraulic Hose.125 inch is selected as the Hose Round Up value. ensure 1/2 in. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. 3 On the Rules tab. 70 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes .Swivel style. ensure 1/2 in. 8 Click Save. 4 Click New. 6 On the Size tab.

several types of points are available for selection. Although flexible route fittings are typically connected to other fittings in the active route or an adjacent route. In addition. Valid fitting connection points include: ■ ■ A connection on other tube and pipe fittings A connection on a standard Autodesk Inventor part that has been authored using the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool and published to the Autodesk Inventor Content Center Library The end of a tube. pipe. see “About Rigid Routes and Runs” on page 32. NOTE Once a 3D hose spline is finished by right-clicking and selecting Done. For more information. click the New Route tool on the Tube & Pipe panel bar to define new hose assembly. such as the 3D Orthogonal Route tool and direction axes. or hose segment A circular edge on any component ■ ■ Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 71 .Creating Flexible Hose Routes With a flexible hose style active. Segment points created by selecting arbitrary points offset from a face are not associative and do not update to changes in the model geometry. New Route tool on the Tube & Pipe panel bar Route tool on the Route panel bar Many tools and guides used for creating hose routes are the same as those used for piping and tubing routes. You can insert intermediate nodes in the 3D hose spline. you can only insert intermediate nodes onto the spline. you can select points offset from a face. Valid points for intermediate flexible hose nodes are the same as those for rigid routes. See “Understanding Rigid Route Node Points” on page 34 for a list of valid points.

72 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes .iam. NOTE If the total number of pipe routes in the assembly differs from the example. and then click OK. The style specifies a subassembly structure that contains both a start and end fitting. To create a hose route subassembly with both start and end fittings 1 With Pipe Run 2 active.Swivel (1/2 ND 2) style from the Active Style list. Flexible Hose 1 is added and Pipe Route 3 is activated by default. The Create New Hose dialog box appears with the default file name and file location. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. The Flexible Hose 1 subassembly is added under Pipe Run 2. where <13-digit number> is a number that is automatically assigned based on the current time of your computer. click the New Route tool.Create a Hose Route with Both Fittings In this exercise you use a style you created earlier to create a hose route. select the Hydraulic HoseFemale Thread . your route number may also differ. 3 Enter Air_Hose1.<13-digit number>. on the standard toolbar.iam in the New File Name box and ensure that Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Tube and Pipe\Tutorial Files is in the File Location box. The hose route is treated as an assembly file instead of a simple route. The default file name is pifhose.

Notice that the start fitting and end fitting reference the same part file in the Autodesk Inventor Content Center Library. 5 Change the direction for the fitting connection. The start fitting specified by the hose style is attached to the cursor and ready for placement. The direction axis on the part should point in the direction of the route. Right-click and select Next Connection. 6 Move the cursor to the start node point on the geometry as shown in the following image. start point The end fitting appears and is attached to the cursor. and then click to set the start fitting.4 Click the Route tool. or press the spacebar. Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 73 .

and then click to set the hose node. 74 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . preview line end point The preview line provides a general idea of the resulting route.7 Move the cursor to the end node point Valve:1. and click to set the end fitting. move the cursor close to the circular edge. 8 To add an intermediate node tangent to a circular edge on IBeam.

9 Right-click and select Done. or press the spacebar. To change the tangent direction of the spline indicated by the red arrow. right-click and select Select Other Direction. flexible hose route (unpopulated) Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 75 . the circular edge is highlighted. 10 Right-click and select Finish Edit.When the associated center node is selected.

click the Populate Route tool. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar.Populate Flexible Hose Routes Similar to pipe and tubing routes. flexible hose route (populated) 76 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. After the route is populated. 3 Right-click and select Finish Edit. a Flexible Hose part is added to the browser at the bottom of the flexible hose subassembly. you can populate the hose route with library components after editing is complete.

click Browse. and then search for and locate a part from the compatible parts list. You cannot modify those components directly using the Model browser. 2 On the Route panel bar. or End Fitting is empty. Autodesk Inventor Professional recomputes the hose route. Autodesk Inventor Professional automatically locates the member in the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. 4 On the Fittings tab. If the part family does not contain the member with the desired nominal diameter. If Pipe. When modifying the nominal diameter in the style: ■ If the part family (hose. verify the Fittings Types list. you must search for and locate them. Start Fitting. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. 3 On the Size tab. Fitting Types list. Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 77 . ■ To change nominal diameters of hose route components 1 Activate Pipe Route 3 within the Flexible Hose 1 subassembly or Pipe Run 2.Swivel (1/2 ND 2) style is active. hose segment. click Browse to start the Library Browser tool. and end fitting in the hose route. and end fitting) contains the member with the desired nominal diameter. On the Fittings tab. start fitting. Verify that the Hydraulic Hose. 5 Click Save.Female Thread . 6 Click Apply or OK. The new diameter applies to the start fitting. change the Nominal Diameter from 1/2 in to 5/16 in.Change Nominal Diameters The diameters of all components in a flexible hose route are controlled by the flexible hose style. Fittings tab. and then select one from the compatible parts list.

3 Right-click Pipe Route 3. and select Delete Route. 4 In the Delete Route Components dialog box. If only segments are deleted. it is recommended that you delete both the hose segments and the fittings. 2 If the Flexible Hose 1 subassembly is collapsed. For this exercise. When deleting. click to expand it. To delete a hose route 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. the fittings are moved to the top of the browser and are available for future use. 78 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . 5 Save the top-level assembly. you are prompted to indicate whether to delete all segments and fittings in the route or only the segments.Delete Flexible Hose Routes You can delete both populated and unpopulated hose routes. The Flexible Hose subassembly is deleted completely. and then click OK. make sure Fittings and Segments of Selected Route is selected.

iam. If the 3D Orthogonal tool is not displayed. Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 79 . Content Center tool 3 Navigate to and click Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Tee ➤ ASME B16. click the Content Center tool. click the New Route tool. and then click Edit Fitting Orientation. see “Placing Tube and Pipe Parts” on page 121. This flexible hose style suppresses the end fitting so the hose route ends at the tee. 4 Use the 3D Orthogonal Route tool to rotate the tee to the orientation as shown in the following image. right-click the tee.Female Thread . select the Hydraulic Hose.Create a Hose Route With One Fitting In this exercise. you place a threaded tee onto the threaded steel pipe you previously created.Swivel (1/2 ND 1) style from the Active Style list.Class 3000 (1/2 ND). 5 Right-click and select Done. and create a hose route using the Hydraulic Hose. To create a hose route 1 Activate Pipe Run 2.Female Thread . On the Route panel bar. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. Pipe Route 4 is added to Pipe Run 2. For detailed instructions on i-drop fittings from the Content Center Library. and then i-drop the tee on the downward pipe segment in the threaded steel route you previously created.11 Tee Threaded . Save the flexible hose assembly as Air_Hose2. tee fitting 6 7 On the standard toolbar.Swivel (1/2 ND 1) style.

and click OK.8 Click the Route tool. 80 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . 11 Pause the cursor over the planar face of the IBeam. enter 3 inches. 13 Click the IBeam. The default offset distance is 0. 9 Select the start node point on the same geometry as in the previous exercise. 12 In the Edit Offset dialog box.440 inch. 10 Rotate the assembly as shown in the following image. right-click and select Edit Offset.

15 Right-click and select Done. Look for the corresponding flexible hose subassembly under the pipe run. 16 Right-click and select Finish Edit. intermediate point tee fitting Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 81 .14 Select the tee to set the final node.

82 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . For detailed instructions. Editing Flexible Hose Routes You can edit both populated and unpopulated hose routes in several ways.17 Populate the hose route. Change the diameters of all components in the hose route. In this exercise. Your assembly should look like the following image. see “Change Nominal Diameters” on page 77. you use the hose subassembly you just created to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Edit hose nodes and hose length. Check the bend radius and clear violations. Edit the active style to change the start fitting and end fitting.

The route recomputes with each new hose node. To add a hose node 1 Activate Pipe Route 4 in the Flexible Hose subassembly. click the Insert Node tool. 4 Right-click the spline below the IBeam. and select Insert Node to add another hose node. and then move the cursor over the hose spline. redefine the hose nodes. Insert Node tool You can also adjust the hose node position and orientation using the 3D Move/Rotate tool. 5 Click to insert the second node.Hose Nodes After you finish editing a hose route and before it is populated. you can use the Insert Node tool to insert new hose nodes. Editing Flexible Hose Routes | 83 . 3 Click to insert the first node. The spline segment is highlighted with a green point indicating the intermediate node position is valid. 2 On the Route panel bar. and delete nodes.

The route is recomputed. The offset guide indicates the offset value. and then enter a precise value. right-click the node and select Delete.440 in. 3 After deleting both node points. the Edit Offset tool appears. 4 Right-click and select Done. click to set the node. save the top-level assembly file. NOTE If you want to move the hose node that is tangent to the circular edge of the IBeam. pause the cursor at an appropriate point. 1 To change the position of the new node.To move a hose node 1 Right-click the new node point. You can also enter a precise value along the X. 2 Repeat to delete the other inserted node point. 3 Click Apply or OK. 3 Do either of the following: ■ ■ To use the default offset value. When you move the cursor over planar surfaces or existing work geometry. and select 3D Move/Rotate. you must right-click the node and clear the Associative check mark. rightclick and select Edit Offset. 2 Move the cursor to the planar face of the I-Beam. By default it is the last selected offset value or the system default value of 0. 2 Drag the triad in any direction. To redefine a hose node In this exercise you redefine the hose node and learn how to create an offset point. Deleting such hose nodes enables you to redefine hose nodes using the Route tool. To change the offset value. right-click the node point and select Redefine. 84 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . Y or Z axes. To delete a hose node 1 To delete the node point that you inserted. NOTE You can delete the start or end hose node only when the flexible hose style suppresses both fittings or the end fitting respectively.

you can use the 3D Move/Rotate tool to adjust specific nodes and change the hose length closer to the desired length. click the Hose Length tool. 5 Once you are satisfied with the hose length. 3 Drag the slider to the left and right to see the effects of the movement on the spline. You can choose which one to display when documenting hose routes. When adjusting the hose length. click OK. The values specific to your own exercise may be a bit different since positions of hose nodes may be different. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. Hose Length tool To adjust the length of a hose route 1 Activate Pipe Route 4 in Pipe Run 2. A green preview spline represents the hose that results.Hose Length When the hose is too slack or too tight. Editing Flexible Hose Routes | 85 . You can modify the length of a hose route precisely using the Hose Length tool. there are two types of length values displayed: Actual Length and Rounded Length. 4 Click the Decrease the Scale tool or the Increase the scale tool to change the length range. The Edit Hose Length dialog box displays the actual length and the rounded length. Rounded length is calculated from the Hose Round Up Value specified in the style.

NOTE If you want to remove both start fitting and end fitting. To replace the start fitting 1 Activate Pipe Route 4 in the Flexible Hose 2 subassembly. The start fitting used in the style is displayed. 3 On the Fittings tab. 6 Click OK. You must do the following: ■ ■ ■ Change the start fitting. Delete the newly added end fitting. 7 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. you can choose to suppress the start fitting and the end fitting is suppressed automatically. and then click OK. The Library Browser filters out all the hose family and fittings in compatible standards. Add a new end fitting. 5 Navigate to Parker Male Taper Thread ➤ Swivel 0 Parker Male Taper Thread ➤ Swivel 1/2 x 1/2. or restore a suppressed fitting. 2 On the Route panel bar. The start fitting in the graphics window and in the Model browser is changed. remove a fitting. 86 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . click Save. In this exercise. the hose style in use has specified the start fitting only and suppressed the end fitting. 4 Click Browse to access the Content Center Library. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. You can change existing fittings.Start Fitting and End Fitting Use the style to modify fittings in flexible hose routes. select Start Fitting from the Fitting Types list.

the error icon automatically disappears.To add and remove an end fitting 1 Open the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box for the hose route style to receive the new end fitting. and then click OK.Swivel (1/2 ND 1). Editing Flexible Hose Routes | 87 . but violations still exist in the hose route until you manually correct them. A new end fitting for the hose route connects the hose segment and the tee. In this case.Female Thread . suppressed end fitting end fitting included Bend Radius Check The Flexible Hose style determines the minimum bend radius. a yellow error icon is displayed after bend radius check. When violations are corrected. 4 Click Save. select End Fitting from the Fitting Types list. check the bend radius again or click Return on the standard toolbar to update the hose route. NOTE You can use the Clear Violation tool to remove the error icon from the Model browser at any time. Hydraulic Hose. 2 On the Fitting tab. use Bend Radius Check tool to verify a single hose route or all hose routes under the pipe run. Before populating. If any bend radius in a hose route is smaller than the minimum value or the route is self-intersecting. 3 Clear the check mark for Suppress Fitting.

Clear the Use subassembly check box. The corresponding hose subassembly is named in Flexible Hose 2.Swivel style. 4 Edit the hose route. The corresponding hose subassembly is named in Flexible Hose 3. using the Hydraulic Hose. 2 Right-click the hose route in the browser. and click Bend Radius ➤ Check. Optionally. 4 Create a hose route Air_Hose3. 2 Practice deleting the current hose route.Swivel (1/2 ND 1) style.Swivel (1/2 ND 0) style. 3 Create a hose route with a subassembly and a start fitting only. Note the flexible hose and hose components in the browser.Female Thread . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Name it Flat Hose with Female Swivel (1/2 ND 2). 3 If the Error dialog box displays the violations against the minimum bend radius. Keep other parameters as they are.To check the bend radius 1 Activate the hose route. 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 until no violations occur.Female Thread . Nominal Diameter is 1/2 in. right-click the hose route or the pipe run.Female Thread . You can use the Hydraulic Hose. click OK. click Bend Radius ➤ Clear Violation. Create a route using the new style. 88 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . Experiment with saving the fittings and not saving the fittings. Practice Your Skills Using the skills you have learned from the previous exercises.iam with no start and end fittings. try the following: 1 Create a new hose style with a flat structure that is based on the Hydraulic Hose .

use the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool to author tube and pipe iParts. You also learn how to publish normal parts as fittings.Authoring and Publishing In This Chapter 5 The Autodesk Inventor® Content Center Library provides standard Inventor parts. In this chapter. ® ■ About Content Center ■ About Content Center Library ■ Configuring Content Center Libraries ■ Authoring tube and pipe parts ■ Publishing to Content Center ■ Creating styles using published parts ■ Placing tube and pipe parts 89 . you learn how to use the Content Center tool to navigate to and i-drop library parts. as well as conduit parts and tube and pipe fittings. and use the Publish Part tool to publish authored parts to the Content Center Library for future use in tube and pipe assemblies. The components comply with industry standards.

Changes are submitted in the Content Center Library. Publish normal parts. Permissions to edit and publish in the Content Center are set when you install Autodesk Inventor. you must have permissions to edit and publish in the Content Center. you may use the Content Center tool to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Find a part in the Content Center Library. or features to specific categories and families the Content Center Library. i-drop a library part into an assembly. 90 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . and modify the permissions to the Content Center during reinstallation. To change permissions. Change parameters for library parts. For more information about the Content Center. Content Center section. refer to Autodesk Inventor Help. Configure libraries. NOTE In these exercises. start the Autodesk Inventor installation program. iParts. Depending on the permissions you set. Edit the library parts placed in an assembly. and add or remove parts within a part family.About Content Center The Content Center is an Autodesk Inventor® tool used for accessing and maintaining the Content Center Library.

Using the Configure Libraries tool. Using the Publish Part or Publish Feature tool. Configuring Content Center Libraries If you have permissions to edit and publish in the Content Center. Use the Content Center tool to access the Content Center Library. Content Center section. You access the library parts using the Content Center tool.ipt file is created for the inserted part and is added to the Model browser. When a library part is dropped into an assembly. elbows. an . Access the Content Center Library The Content Center Library is available as soon as you have an assembly file or a part file open. Autodesk Inventor automatically creates an empty custom library named MyLibrary. Content Center tool About Content Center Library | 91 . shaft parts) and features that can be i-dropped into assemblies. and edit or delete existing custom libraries in the Libraries list. see Autodesk Inventor Help. you can add your own parts or features that have been authored to the Content Center Library for easy access and reuse. Libraries from several different industry standards are provided. steel shapes. flanges. Once you locate the part you need in a library. you set parameters for the part. you can add new libraries. and so on) that are standard for creating tube and pipe systems. tubes) and tube and pipe fittings (couplings. import Inventor libraries and the Tube & Pipe Library from previous versions.About Content Center Library The Content Center Library contains libraries of standard and custom Autodesk Inventor parts (fasteners. tees. It also includes conduit parts (hoses. pipes. and then use i-drop to insert the part in the assembly file or directly onto a run. For more information about the Content Center Library.

To access the Content Center Library 1 Open an assembly or a part. tools menu. depending on the context in which you activate the Content Center tool. the Content Center can be accessed from the context menu. depending on the type of file opened: ■ ■ Assembly panel bar Part Features panel bar Alternatively. Menu Options Toolbar Category View Panel List Panel Content Member Selection Panel Buttons 92 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . The look and feel of the Content Center dialog box may differ. 2 Click the Content Center tool on one of the following panel bars. and Tube & Pipe panel bar. The Content Center dialog box is displayed as shown in the following image.

You can delete the library permanently if it is no longer used. a new library is attached to the Content Center automatically right after you create it. Configure Libraries tool New Library tool To create a new library 1 Open the Content Center dialog box. 4 Select Single User Library (Local). Autodesk Inventor may prompt you if a duplicate library name exists. 2 On the toolbar. By default. 5 Enter the library name. make sure no library is selected. click the Configure Libraries tool. 6 Click OK. If the library with the same name is not displayed in the Libraries table. 3 In the Configure Libraries dialog box. exit Autodesk Inventor and go to Start ➤ Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ Autodesk Inventor (version) ➤ Tools ➤ Content Center Library Manager to see if the library exists.Create a New Library You can create new local libraries or shared libraries on a remote machine for the Content Center use. NOTE When creating a new library. Configuring Content Center Libraries | 93 . CustomLibrary. The Libraries table indicates the access permission that you have to each library. It is displayed in the Libraries table. and then click the New Library tool.

94 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . Select tab. All content in each library is merged together when you navigate the library items.View Source Libraries The Content Center tool can attach to a set of libraries. In the Content Selection Details dialog box. you can view which library it comes from on the Content Member Selection panel. click OK. When you select a part or feature family. To view the source library of a part or feature family 1 Open the Content Center dialog box. 4 In the Content Selection Details dialog box. if not already open. 5 Close the Content Center dialog box. 3 Click Details under the preview image of the selected part or feature. Select tab. 2 Go to the Content Member Selection panel. the Source Content Center Library is displayed.

You can author and publish tube and pipe iParts as either pipes or fittings. When authoring tube and pipe iParts.Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts After you create a custom fitting or component and transform it to an iPart factory. you specify a fixed nominal size. You can also author and publish a normal part (not an iPart) as a fitting. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 95 . you specify: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Type Connection number End treatment Parameter and iPart table mapping Connection point and connection axis Gender (female or male) Engagement for the iPart ISOGEN properties for fittings When authoring normal parts. with the exception of the Parameter and iPart table mapping. It its place. but can only author and publish normal parts as fittings. you specify all of the previous items. you can use the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool to prepare the part for publishing to the Content Center.

Access the Tube & Pipe Authoring Tool The Tube & Pipe Authoring tool is available as soon as you have an iPart or a normal part file open. 2 On the Part Features panel bar. 96 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . Tube & Pipe Authoring tool To access the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool 1 Open a normal part or an iPart file. For information on preparing tube and pipe iParts. see Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help. Content Center section. The Tube & Pipe Authoring tool displays. click the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool.

Pipe. pipes. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 97 . elbow. elbows. end treatment. ■ ■ Red buttons indicate that the connection criteria have not been satisfied. required part parameters. set a new value in the Connections list. If you do not want to make the part available from the library. These three part types are not available when you are authoring a normal part.Author Parameters Use the Tube & Pipe Authoring dialog box to specify the part type. Black buttons indicates the connection has the necessary information for authoring and publishing. Continue to click buttons and set parameters until all connections are defined. ■ To author a standard. two-connection segment. Click the connection number button representing the connection to set. ■ ■ All standard part types such as tubes. adapters. or Hose. Type Specifies the part type to author from the available list. Each part type defaults to a connection number. To author a standard fitting. The selected type determines the root category to which you can publish the part in the Content Center. Once authored. The button changes from red to black when required connection criteria is satisfied. Connection Number Specifies the connection to define. select Tube. crosses. select Other. number of connections. select any of the available fitting types. you can publish them to the Content Center. hoses. engagement. and so on are available for authoring and publishing. click the appropriate fitting image. tee. If you do not use the default number of connections. you can save the part to a different location. If it does not fit into any available fitting types. If you are authoring a cap. flanges. The number of connections changes dynamically depending on the quantity specified for the part being authored. and optional ISOGEN properties for tube and pipe iParts or normal parts being authored. Connections Specifies the number of connections for the part being authored. or cross.

Fitting iParts must contain: ■ Nominal diameter (ND) Conduit iParts must contain: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Nominal diameter (ND) Schedule number (SN) Outside diameter (OD) Inside diameter (ID) Pipe length (PL) NOTE Pipe Length is only required on the first connection number. You can reset them if the connection is a different size. 98 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . The End Engagement list filters out all possible end treatments for the current connection point. Click the arrow to select a parameter from the list. Nominal Size Specifies the fixed nominal size of the normal part being authored. This setting is available only when you are authoring a normal part. Once set. Normal parts can only be authored and published as fittings. All listed parameters must be mapped. You do not need to map the iPart column to Pipe Length for all other connection numbers. Parameter Specifies parameters for each connection number. Click the arrow to select an end treatment from the list. parameter mappings are automatically populated for all other connections.End Treatment Specifies the end treatment used for each connection number. This setting is available only when you are authoring a tube and pipe iPart. and then map each one to the appropriate iPart table column.

Connection Axis tool Female Flip direction Engagement Before a custom fitting can be placed in a tube and pipe assembly. Connection Axis tool Connection Point tool Connection Point tool Sets the point at which the fitting connects with existing geometry. Click the icon. and then select either a circular edge or existing work axis for the connection. set and map the parameter before you continue. A work point is displayed at the center of the circular edge. Sets the direction in which to connect the part being published. Connection Axis. type. In this case. engagement information must be set. To flip the arrow in the opposite direction. Pipe engagement determines the range (minimum and maximum engagement position values) for how a pipe is inserted into a fitting. Click the icon. An arrow in the graphics window shows the set axis direction. and direction of the axis. click the Flip Direction button. The MaxEP is defined by a work point on the connection axis. Select the Female check box for female connections.Connection Point. Library parts from the Content Center already include this information. Gender Connection settings determine the connection geometry. The axis direction should point outside of the part. A warning message is displayed if you do not complete the table mapping before you start to set the connection parameters. Changes the axis to the opposite direction. clear it for male. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 99 . not inside. and then select either a circular edge or existing work point for the connection in the graphics window. This section has four options.

The point can be an existing work point or work point that is created by the intersection of a selected planar face and the work axis. There are three types of engagement that you can set: Fixed The actual maximum engagement position distance. The minimum engagement position (MinEP) is the distance from the connection point to the MinEP. and updates dynamically as changes are made to the MaxEP and MinEP settings.The maximum engagement position (MaxEP) work point can be an existing work point or it can be created by the intersection of a selected planar face and the connection axis: ■ ■ The actual MaxEP distance is the distance from the connection point to the MaxEP point along the connection axis. Establishes an association between the connection point and a work point representing the maximum engagement position. Ratio Max Engagement (Associated) 100 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . The MaxEP is a percentage of the nominal size value (NS). engagement range (in orange) connection axis direction (in purple and blue) NOTE The Engagement section of the dialog box is not enabled until the required settings in the previous sections are set. This engagement type automatically adjusts to changes in the nominal size. You can enter the distance in the dialog box. The set engagement range displays in the graphics window. or click a point on the connection axis.

Depending on the minimum increment set in the style.pcf files. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 101 . Wild card values of **. the pipe fitting procedure applies the defined minimum and maximum to ensure the engagement position is within the specified range. or interactively by selecting geometry in the graphics window. The minimum engagement position is always specified as a percentage of the MaxEP distance. NOTE For more information about setting the different types of engagement. you must add certain properties to the published part. When a pipe is inserted into a fitting. and then set a maximum input value. You can set the value directly in the dialog box. Four-character symbol keys that consist of the twocharacter pairs for part type and their valid end types. refer to the Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help. you check or clear the Fixed check box. The ISOGEN properties you must add are: Type ISOGEN SKEY Specifies the piping component type property required by ISOGEN . or + may also be included in the SKEY. Content Center section. you select the ISOGEN Properties check box.Depending on the engagement method you choose. To add the ISOGEN information. ISOGEN Properties To support the optional ISOGEN output format. @. The SKEY is used as part of ISOGEN end point input. the end of the pipe falls between the MinEP and the MaxEP. The wild card values are replaced by additional information such as a range of integer values denoting bend radius or number of segments.

refer to: ■ Autodesk Inventor Professional Skill Builders on the Autodesk Web site: Publishing and Styles. Content Center section. Autodesk Inventor Professional Help Tube and Pipe Help.com/inventorpro-skillbuilder. right-click. It is available at the hyperlink: http://www. Click the column head to select the entire column. When a sample tube and pipe iPart is open: ■ Use the Parameters tool on the Part Features tab to verify the model parameters and user parameters that are used in the iPart.autodesk. you use sample iParts to learn how to author and publish to the Content Center. To learn the required parameters for authoring and publishing.Prepare iParts When creating the iPart. Each row in the iPart Author table represents a part occurrence for the part family to publish to the Content Center. ■ In this exercise. Verify all part occurrences that are defined for the iPart. It is recommended that you learn what parameters are required to author tube and pipe parts. It is recommended that you use model equations to define the part parameters so that multiple part occurrences specified in the iPart Authoring table can dynamically update in proportion. specify them as Custom Parameter Column in the iPart Author table before authoring. make sure the necessary values are included in the iPart table. You can then create appropriate parameters and features when transforming the part to an iPart factory. To quickly locate the topic. search for and select “iParts” in the index. and then select click Custom Parameter Column. If you need to customize the schedule number and pipe length of the part when i-dropping from the Content Center Library at a later time. For more information about preparing an iPart. ■ ■ 102 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . see “Parameter” on page 98. Double-click Table in the Model browser to open the iPart Author table.

3 In the Type list.ipt part file. In addition. you use the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool to standardize three sample iParts that are stored in C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional 10\Tube & Pipe\Tutorial Files\Example_iparts: union iPart. 2 Click the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool on the Part Feature panel bar. select Unions. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 103 .Author iParts In this exercise. select Threaded for Connection 1. You can specify the ISOGEN properties for the sample union iPart. Union iPart In this exercise. Keep in mind that you cannot select an edge adjacent to a torus or spline face to define connection points and connection axes. 4 Verify that connection number button 1 is selected to indicate that you are setting the information for Connection 1. In the exercises of authoring the 45-degree and 90-degree elbow iParts. and pipe iPart. you learn to define connection points and connection axes using existing work points and work axes that were prepared for the exercises. you can use the skills learned from authoring tube and pipe iParts to author normal parts. ■ ■ In the exercises of authoring the union and pipe iParts. 45degree and 90-degree elbow iParts. 5 In the End Treatment list. Select 2 in the Connections list. you define connection points and connection axes through valid edges. To author a union iPart 1 Open the JIS_B_2301_MaleFemaleUnionTypeFClassI. you learn to define connection points and connection axes using valid circular edges.

This maps the Nominal Size parameter to the ND column in the Table Mapping column.6 Click the table mapping cell adjacent to Nominal Size parameter. A connection point is displayed at the center of the circular edge. connection point 10 Click the Connection Axis tool. Connection Point tool 8 Pause the cursor over the geometry until the circular edge is highlighted as shown. and then define the connection axis in the graphics window. Connection Axis tool 104 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . click the arrow. 7 Click the Connection Point tool. selected edge 9 Click to select the highlighted edge. and then scroll to select ND (nominal diameter). and then select the connection point in the graphics window.

and click to select. was not yet set. NOTE If the engagement section is dimmed. click Flip Direction. 13 Specify the Engagement setting.5 millimeters as the value for Max. Use the default 50% as the value of Min. Connection axis direction If the axis points toward the inside of the part. The value of the specified MaxEP is shown in the dialog box and the corresponding length of the MaxEP distance is shown in the graphics window. and enter 11. engagement range Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 105 . a required setting. such as the connection axis.11 Pause the cursor over the same circular edge that you selected for the work point. The actual MaxEP distance is the projected distance from the connection point to the MaxEP point along the connection axis. An arrow shows the axis direction. check the Fixed check box. For this example. 12 Clear the Female check box to indicate that it is a male type connection. You must complete all previous settings before you can set engagement values.

indicating that all connection criteria are satisfied for Connection 1. Rotate tool 15 Click the connection number button 2 to begin defining the second connection. and because the nominal sizes are the same. 14 Click the Rotate tool on the standard toolbar or click in the graphics window and then press F4 to rotate the part so that you can see Connection 2. End Treatment: Threaded Connection Point and Connection Axis: See the following images Connection: Female connection point connection axis and direction 106 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . you do not need to set it again. The parameter mapping is populated with information set for Connection 1.The connection number button 1 should now be black.

18 Save the authored union iPart and close the part file.Engagement: Clear the Fixed check box. click the Max Engagement tool. and then select the face of the connector to set an associated engagement. connection axis. All authoring changes are saved for the next time you want to author the iPart again. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 107 . some required information is missing. You can publish the authored union to the Content Center at a later time. The connection point. NOTE If the connection number button is not black. face 16 Specify the following ISOGEN properties: Type: UNION SKey: UN** Union Wildcard: BW Butt Weld 17 Click OK. You must supply the required information to complete the authoring. and nominal size mapping settings are required.

ipt part file.Pipe iPart In this exercise. 2 Click the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool on the Part Features panel bar. Connection: Female Engagement: Fixed Max % of NS: 0 Min % of Max: 0 connection point 1 connection axis 1 108 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . 3 In the Tube & Pipe Authoring dialog box. You cannot define the ISOGEN properties when authoring conduit parts. To author the pipe iPart 1 Open the pipe. you define connection points and connection axes through valid edges. specify: Type: Pipes Connections: 2 4 Set the following for Connection 1: End Treatment: Welded Parameter and Table Mapping: Nominal Size: NPS Schedule Number: SCH Inside Diameter: ID Outside Diameter: OD Pipe Length: PL Connection Point and Connection Axis: See images that follow.

connection point 2 connection axis 2 NOTE For the Tubes. The Pipe Length parameter is unique for a conduit part. and Hoses part types being authored. Pipes. Be sure to set the end treatment. 6 Repeat step 4 for connection 2 using the connection point and connection axis shown.5 Click Connection number button 2. Notice that the parameters are already mapped. 7 Click OK. and close the part file. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 109 . you do not need to specify the Pipe Length parameter for connections other than Connection 1. 8 Save the authored pipe iPart.

Elbow iPart In this exercise. In the following image. specify: Type: Elbows Connections: 2 5 Click connection number button 1. To author the 45 degree elbow iPart 1 Open the 45elbow. work points and work axes that were created to define connection points and axes are displayed in the Model browser. 110 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . right-click. you define connection points and connection axes using existing work points and work axes that were created before authoring.ipt part file. Click the browser icon to highlight the corresponding work point or work axis in the graphics window. and select Visibility. 4 In the Tube & Pipe Authoring dialog box. 3 Click the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool on the Part Features panel bar. predefined work points and work axes (invisible) 2 Press Ctrl or Shift to select all predefined work points and work axes in the browser.

3 Save the authored 90-degree elbow iPart.Elbow .6 Set the following: End Treatment: Welded Parameter and Table Mapping: Nominal Size: NPS Connection Point and Connection Axis: See the following images Connection: Female Engagement: Fixed Max % of NS: 0 Min % of Max: 0 work point 1 work axis 1 7 Click connection number button 2. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 111 .ipt part file.Butt Weld (90 degree and 45 degree) 9 Click OK. 2 Repeat the steps above using the same settings and connection points as for the 45-degree elbow iPart. and close the part file. and then repeat Step 6 using the following image to set the Connection Point and Connection Axis. 10 Save the authored 45-degree elbow iPart. and close the part file. work point 2 work axis 2 8 Specify the following ISOGEN properties: Type: ELBOW SKey: ELBW . To define the 90-degree elbow iPart 1 Open the 90LongElbow.

iParts. Create appropriate subcategories as you need. and features to the Content Center. Use the default number of connections or set the connections you need. Enter a fixed nominal size. parts. you must have permissions of editing and publishing in the Content Center Library. Reinstall Autodesk Inventor to change permissions if needed.Practice Your Skills Use the skills you have learned from the previous exercises. specify: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select one fitting type. 112 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . 4 Click OK. or features. 2 Click the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool. try to author a normal part. 3 In the Tube & Pipe Authoring dialog box. Select an appropriate End Treatment option depending on the part feature. Specify the Max and Min Engagement settings using the Fixed option or the interactive method. 1 Prepare a normal part using Autodesk Inventor. When publishing parts. Enter a value for the nominal size. 5 Save the authored normal part. Specify the gender as Female or Male for each connection. such as Type and SKey. and then specify the family properties and category parameters so the published parts or features can be queried at a later time. Define the connection point and connection axis using geometry on the part or predefined work points and work axes. Keep in mind that you can only: ■ ■ Author a normal part as fittings. the Content Center automatically points to the default category where you must publish the part. Publishing to Content Center To publish iParts. Optionally set ISOGEN properties.

The library that is depressed is the active library you are currently publishing to. You can also click the arrow next to the Libraries list. Publish Tool On the left of the Publish dialog box.For more information. click to restore the default category in the library tree. the publishing functionality is disabled for the category that was changed to. see “About Content Center Library” on page 91. otherwise. The default category points to Elbows in the library tree. To publish parts or features to a specific library. click the library button. the Libraries pane lists all available libraries in the Content Center. and then select a library to change to another library. Publishing to Content Center | 113 . To continue the publishing process. NOTE Do not change the default category Autodesk Inventor matches in the Content Center. The following image shows the Publish dialog box for an authored union iPart.

Controls the view method for the library content in the main pane. Provides tools to configure the Content Center Library and library content. Content Center. you can create new libraries or attach existing libraries to the Content Center. Renames a category. creating new categories. or Details. viewing and defining family properties. 114 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . Rename New Category Family Properties Views Tools For more information. Displays the parent page.Toolbar Toolbar options are dependent on the current context. Creates a new subcategory within the selected category. or eg at F y Pr es rt i pe o s o To ls B k ac Up le De te e C m na ew N Re ily am ew Vi Back Up Delete Displays the previously viewed page. Deletes a part or feature family that was added to the Content Center Library using the Publish Part or Publish Feature tool. Click the arrow to select: Thumbnails. Publish section. Displays the Family Properties dialog box to define the family properties for the published part family. see Autodesk Inventor Help. List. which is one level up in the structure of the current page. In addition to deleting and renaming categories.

you can create new subcategories within the default category. Those parameters are defined by each row in the iPart Author table when you prepare the iPart for authoring and publishing. A category is a logical grouping of part types.Category List and Family List The Category List displays all categories in the active library. and cannot be edited. The Family List displays all part or feature families when you select a category. NOTE For authored normal parts. you must map the part parameters to the category parameters. A part family is typically a group of parts that uses one geometric model. Inherited parameters are displayed in the Category Parameters dialog box. The new category inherits all parameters from the parent category. part families. but each part has different parameters. In addition to the inherited parameters. you can create new category parameters. or both sub-categories and part families. The information you provide to define the part sets the structure for its location in Content Center Library. When publishing authored parts. Parts can only be published to libraries that have Read/Write permission. and then publish new subcategories to the active library. provides a base for the part file name and makes the part attributes available for future queries. Publish Part tool Publishing to Content Center | 115 . the published part family contains only one member with a fixed nominal size. and includes sub-categories. To publish authored parts to specified categories. specify category parameters. Publish Authored Parts The Content Center Library setting defines the library where you want the part to belong to.

click the Publish Part tool. you use the Publish Part tool to add authored union. and preview the published union image. 5 Name the new category Custom JIS Components. 116 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . you must specify the Standards Organization and Standard family properties during publishing. see “Configuring Content Center Libraries” on page 91. select CustomLibrary. Alternatively. the Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Unions category is selected by default.ipt part you previously authored. 45-degree elbow. 6 To publish a part family. mapping parameters. For detailed instructions about configuring a library. you can enter the naming and standard information. Union iPart In this exercise. 4 To add a new subcategory under Unions. The empty Custom JIS Components subcategory is added as shown in the following image. In the Publish dialog box. you publish the authored union iPart to CustomLibary. and then select Family Parameters. and 90-degree elbow iParts to CustomLibrary you created in the previous exercise. In the Family Properties dialog box. NOTE If you need to use published parts to define tube and pipe styles. pipe. They are the key style criteria to filter out library parts in the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. on the toolbar of the Publish dialog box. To publish the authored union iPart 1 Open the JIS_B_2301_MaleFemaleUnionTypeFClassI.In the exercises that follow. click the Family Properties tool. you can click the arrow next to the Tools menu. 2 On the Tools menu. 3 In the Libraries panel or list. click the New Category tool on the toolbar of the Publish dialog box.

description. 10 Click OK. The Publish dialog box displays the family name you specified. click the Publish Part tool. the part is added to the CustomLibrary. 11 In the Publish dialog box. specify: Naming: Family Name: JIS_B_2301_MaleFemaleUnionTypeFClassI Description: Custom male and female union Standard: Standard Organization: JIS Manufacturer: SampleUnionCompany Standard: JIS B 2301 Standard Revision: 1 8 In the Family Properties dialog box. 1 Open the pipe. 2 On the Tools menu. Tube & Pipe. General tab. 4 In the Pipes category. Pipe iPart In this exercise. 13 Close the Publish dialog box. 9 In the Family Properties dialog box. 12 When the Publish Result dialog box prompts the successful publish. Parameters tab. 5 Click the Family Properties tool. Unions. verify the publish language. select CustomLibrary to publish. you publish the authored pipe iPart to CustomLibrary. and close the part file. and category path. Fittings. When processing is completed. In the Publish dialog box.7 In the Family Properties dialog box. the Tube & Pipe ➤ Pipes category is selected by default. family name. click OK. You can navigate to the published union part family using the Content Center tool and practice using the i-drop functionality to place it in a sample model or model of your choice.ipt part you previously authored. set the mapping between category parameters and part parameters. 3 In the Libraries panel or list. Publishing to Content Center | 117 . Preview tab. click Publish. Custom JIS Components category. add a new subcategory named Custom.

Preview tab. 2 In the Family Properties dialog box. set the mapping between category parameters and part parameters. General tab. 11 When the Publish Result dialog box prompts the successful publish.6 In the Family Properties dialog box. and close the part file. click OK. specify: Naming: Family Name: pipe Description: Butt Weld Pipe Standard: Standards Organization: SampleStandardsOrganization Manufacturer: SamplePipeCompany Standard: SampleStandard Standard and Revision: 1 7 In the Family Properties dialog box. click Publish. 8 In the Family Properties dialog box. description. specify: Naming: Family Name: 45Elbow Description: Butt Weld 45 Elbow Standard: Standards Organization: SampleStandardsOrganization Manufacturer: SamplePipeCompany Standard: SampleStandard Standard and Revision: 1 118 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . Use Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Elbows ➤ Custom as the category path. verify the publish language. To publish the 45-degree elbow iPart 1 Repeat the steps above to publish the 45-degree elbow iPart to CustomLibrary. Elbow iPart Use the skills you just learned to publish the 45-degree and 90-degree elbow iParts. and category path. family name. Parameters tab. General tab. 9 Click OK. 10 In the Publish dialog box. 12 Close the Publish dialog box.

Use Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Elbows ➤ Custom as the category path. click OK. set the mapping between category parameters and part parameters. 7 When the Publish Result dialog box prompts the successful publish. click Publish. General tab. 4 On the Preview tab. and category path. description. and category path. Publishing to Content Center | 119 . and close the part file. specify: Naming: Family Name: 90LongElbow Description: Butt Weld 90 Long Elbow Standard: Standards Organization: SampleStandardsOrganization Manufacturer: SamplePipeCompany Standard: SampleStandard Standard and Revision: 1 3 On the Parameters tab. 4 On the Preview tab. 8 Close the Publish dialog box. click Publish. To publish the 90-degree elbow iPart 1 Repeat the steps to publish the 90-degree elbow iPart to CustomLibrary. verify the publish language. family name.3 On the Parameters tab. 8 Close the Publish dialog box. 7 When the Publish Result dialog box prompts the successful publish. 6 On the Publish dialog box. 5 Click OK. and close the part file. verify the publish language. 5 Click OK. 6 On the Publish dialog box. set the mapping between category parameters and part parameters. click OK. family name. 2 In the Family Properties dialog box. description.

To set a new style with published parts 1 With a tube and pipe runs assembly open.Creating Styles Using Published Parts Once you successfully publish custom conduit parts and fittings to the Content Center Library. Standard: *. do not require a coupling. and a coupling. 2 Create a new style named SamplePipeCompany Weld. such as the style in this exercise. General tab. specify: Route Type: Rigid Pipe with Fittings Pipe Material: *. Welded styles. SampleStandard Route Direction: 90 and 45 4 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. Most styles require a pipe. specify: Nominal Diameter Size: 5 in Schedule: 80 5 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. SampleStandard Fitting Material: *.: 1 6 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. and the 90degree elbow using the Library Browser dialog box. the 45-degree elbow. 3 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. Rules tab. specify: Min: 2 Max: 200 Inc. browse to and select the part instance you published for the pipe. you can create new styles based on those published parts. Fittings tab. Standard: *. 7 Click OK. open the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. 120 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . elbows. Size tab. Select any Rigid Pipe with Fittings type style as the base.

Fittings section. You can connect to other components using the Connect Fittings tool. This typically occurs when i-dropping conduit parts. For example. elbows may not be dropped on straight segments.Placing Tube and Pipe Parts You can place conduit parts and fittings from either the Content Center or the active project work space. In this case you insert the new component at route node points that were defined by the fitting being replaced. on straight segments or at route node end points. Segment length must comply with the minimum segment length style once the fitting is placed. Conduit parts can be placed anywhere in the background of the graphics window in addition to being placed on routes or runs. Parts from the Content Center Library are placed using i-drop. For more information on connect fittings. such as size and material differences. Placing Tube and Pipe Parts | 121 . see Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help. The fitting being dropped must also be appropriate for the drop point selected. NOTE If you have changes the default parameters for the library part and it is the first time for i-drop it. They can be dropped anywhere in the graphics window or adjacent to existing fittings. The Place Fitting procedure is covered later in this chapter. you must save it as a custom part before completing the i-drop. Placed fittings can also replace previously placed or deleted fittings. Fittings can be inserted into populated or unpopulated routes. Non library parts from the active project work space are added to the design using the Place Fitting tool on the Tube & Pipe panel bar. but you are alerted to the incompatible conditions. If the fitting is not compatible with the route in some other way. the insertion is allowed.

To insert a library fitting using i-drop 1 Activate Pipe Run 2.Insert Library Parts Using I-drop Library fittings and conduit parts can be inserted into a tube and pipe runs assembly using i-drop. and then use i-drop to insert it into the run. locate a standard fitting. double-click ASME B16.Class 3000. tools menu. In this exercise. To specify a particular part. 122 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . Content Member Selection panel. The Content Member Selection panel is displayed. go to Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Tees. 2 Click the Content Center tool on one of the following panel bars.11 Tee Threaded . the Content Center can be accessed from the context menu. select the nominal diameter. 4 In the List panel. depending on the type of file opened: ■ ■ Assembly panel bar Part Features panel bar Alternatively. 3 In the Content Center dialog box. and Tube & Pipe panel bar. you must select one instance of the fitting on the Content Center dialog box. you activate and populate a run.

To verify the detailed information of the selected tee family, click and go through the Select, Table View, and Family Information tabs.

NOTE To i-drop the part, you must be on the Select tab so the Insert button
is enabled. 5 On the Select tab, ensure that 1/2 is selected in the ND list so it matches the 1/2 inch diameter of the segment on to which it is being dropped. 6 Click Insert. Alternately, you can pause the cursor over the eyedropper, and then click and hold down the left mouse button. The cursor changes to the full eyedropper. 7 Drag the Tee fitting into the open assembly, and then drop it on to the straight segment on Pipe Route 1.

8 Optionally, use the 3D Orthogonal Route tool to edit the orientation of the placed tee. 9 Right-click and select Done. When quitting the i-drop, you can right-click the placed fitting and select Edit Fitting Orientation to display the 3D Orthogonal Route tool again. 10 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

Placing Tube and Pipe Parts

|

123

Place Fittings in the Active Project Work Space
Existing fittings in the active project work space and parts that were prepared using the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool can be added to a run using the Place Fitting tool on the Tube and Pipe panel bar. You can place fittings on to tube and pipe route segments or in the background of the graphics window. Hose routes typically do not accommodate placed fittings. If a library part has converted to a custom part copy in the local Content Center folder that the active project uses, it can also be placed using this tool. For more information, search for and select “fittings, insert“ in the Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help index.

Place Fitting tool

To place a non-library component 1 Activate the pipe run to receive the fitting. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar, click the Place Fitting tool. 3 In the Open dialog box, browse to and select the component to place, and then click Open. The selected component is placed in the graphics window, attached to the cursor. 4 Click a point of your choice for insertion. To insert an elbow, select a direction change node point. To insert other types of components, select any point along an existing run segment. 5 To place additional occurrences of the same part, move the cursor to a different location and click. Continue until all occurrences are placed.
■ ■

6 Right-click and select Done. 7 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

NOTE For consumed fittings in a tube and pipe run assembly, click to
highlight the fitting in the Model browser or the graphics window, and then place more occurrences quickly. Using the Model browser, you can insert any compatible fitting from another pipe run into the target pipe run. Using the graphics window, you can only select fittings within the target pipe run.

124

|

Chapter 5

Authoring and Publishing

Replace Existing Components
Replaced fittings use the route information of the previous part. Orientation and position can be adjusted if the part type and connection information allows. In this exercise, you i-drop a cross from the Content Center Library to replace the tee you just inserted. In addition, you can also place a non library replacement fitting using the Place Fitting tool. To replace an existing component 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. 2 Right-click the tee fitting to replace, and then select Find in Content Center. By default, the Content Center dialog box displays the location of the tee fitting. 3 Navigate to Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Crosses in the Content Center dialog box. 4 In the List panel, select the ASME B16.11 Threaded Cross-Class 3000 part, and ensure that the part instance with the nominal diameter of 1/2 inch is selected. 5 To replace the highlighted fitting, click Replace. The cross is inserted into the run where the tee was.

NOTE To replace all occurrences in the highlighted fitting type, click Replace All.
6 Optionally, use the 3D Orthogonal Route tool to edit the orientation of the placed cross. 7 Right-click and select Done. 8 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

Placing Tube and Pipe Parts

|

125

Practice Your Skills
In this exercise, you use the skills you just learned to insert a pipe part from the Content Center Library into the background of the graphics window. Note that you cannot drop the conduit part on to route segments. In addition to ND (Nominal Diameter), you must specify the SN (Schedule Number) and PL (Pipe Length) parameters. To insert a library pipe part 1 Open the AirSystemAssy.iam file and activate Pipe Run 1. 2 Click the Content Center tool and navigate to Tube & Pipe ➤ Pipes. 3 Select the ASTM A 53/A 53M Pipe with a nominal diameter of 1/4 inch, a schedule number of 40, and a pipe length of 10 inches, and then click Insert. 4 In the Save Custom Part dialog box, use the default location and file name to continue. 5 Place the pipe part anywhere in the background of the graphics window. 6 Right-click and select Done. 7 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

126

|

Chapter 5

Authoring and Publishing

Editing Rigid Routes and Runs

In This Chapter

6

Edits to tube and pipe systems can be made dynamically by editing node points, route segments, fittings, connections, bend radius in tube routes. In this chapter, you learn how to use various panel bar and context menu options to edit routes and runs.

■ Introduction ■ Editing options ■ Controlling display and update

settings
■ Node points ■ Route segments ■ Fittings ■ Connections ■ Editing bent tube routes ■ Deleting routes and runs

127

About Editing Rigid Routes and Runs
Autodesk Inventor® Professional Tube & Pipe provides several methods for updating and modifying each component of a tube and pipe system to accommodate changes in design criteria and in the assembly model. After finishing the initial definition of a route or run, you can continue to make changes. You can:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Insert, reposition, or delete segments and node points. Insert, replace, reposition, delete, and restore fittings. Change fitting diameters. Edit the bend radius of custom bends in pipe routes or all bends in tube routes. Set node points to update dynamically to changes in model geometry. Set node points to update dynamically to changes in the route or run. Set whether or not a coupling appears for associative points.

Using Undo reverses the last action taken during the current editing session, and exits you from the current command.

NOTE Consider the affect of changes to assembly model geometry on which
the routes and runs depend. For example, deleting parts or editing geometry in the model that affects associative route node points may require you to delete the run and redefine the route. Modifying or changing the style is another way of modifying routes and runs. For detailed instructions, see “Change Styles for Existing Routes” on page 26.

128

|

Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs

Editing Options
You can edit both populated and unpopulated routes. If the route is populated, activate the route to edit it in place. Library components populating the route are temporarily not included and the underlying 3D sketch of the route is displayed.

Route Panel Bar
All editing takes place in Route mode. When you are in route mode, the route panel bar is displayed.
pe Pi u Ro te k ts ch or en et h W m Sk de rs d de gt g e e o o n se Se N et Le nd ed tN e e Ba m se ou int riv er it ra ov ov s Gr Po Pa In Ed Ho M M De u Ro te

& be les Tu Sty

Context Menus
Many edit actions start by selecting from the context menu. The context menu varies depending on the edit context and the selected item. In the exercises that follow, you learn the following basic editing tools: 3D Move/Rotate Interactively positions grounded work points or intermediate node points in hose or tube routes by dragging the triad in a planar mode, axial move or rotate, free movement, or entering values along X, Y, or Z axes. Interactively positions free placed fittings in rigid routes by dragging the triad in a planar mode, axial move or rotate, free movement, or entering values along X, Y, or Z axes. Turns association on or off for selected route node points. When checked, if the geometry that the node point is associated to changes, the pipe route node updates to reflect the change. This option is available only for node points associated to other geometry. Changes the diameter for one or more placed fittings and routed fittings that are used by a style to populate routes and runs. The system finds the diameters that are common to all selected fittings and displays them in a list.

3D Move/Rotate Fitting Associative

Change Fitting Diameter

Editing Options

|

129

but not start and end points and node points that are inserted during automatic routing. the fitting is not created. the pipe remains a single segment. When cleared. For node points. and then updates the route. deletes the selected conduit part and the underlying route segment. a conduit part. or hose part or a standard Inventor part and a fitting that was manually inserted from the Content Center Library using the Insert tool or from the active project work space using the Place Fitting tool. or a normal Inventor part that already exists in the assembly to another base component. Removes the selected pipe run from the browser and the graphics window. It is available only for placed fittings.Connect Fittings Connects two components relative to one another in a tube and pipe assembly. or segments only in the selected route. and the nodes remain associative to the selected geometry. deletes the selected route segment. Activates the selected node point and provides the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool for translational edits. Delete Route Delete Run Removes the route. Edit Fitting Connections Edit Fitting Orientation Edit Position Fitting 130 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . ■ ■ ■ Delete For route segments. plus fittings and segments. Turns the appearance of a fitting (coupling) on and off for nodes associated to geometry. You can connect a fitting. Deletes or edits the engagement for fitting connections between two fittings or between a tube. deletes the selected node from the route and re-evaluates automatic routing against the style settings. All routes and components in the pipe run are deleted. For pipe or tube segments. Activates the selected fitting and provides the 3D Orthogonal Route tool for rotational changes. This is available for segments that are adjacent to associative nodes or placed fittings. You can delete manually placed node points. You can also connect fittings when placing or dropping them in the graphics window. pipe.

this new node adds a coupling at the selected route location. Replaces a placed fitting with the default fitting (elbow or coupling) for the set style or replaces an i-dropped fitting with a coupling no matter how many connection points the original placed fitting has. Manually created route points are fixed by default. Hose Length Insert Node Move Node Move Segment Restore Fitting Route Trim/Extend Pipe For more information about commands on the context menu. The system recalculates the automatic routing based on the new position of the selected segment. manually created node points can be modified automatically (added. When Fixed is not selected. By default. tube and pipe“ in the Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help index. Available on the Route panel bar or in the context menu of the graphics window when a route is activated. Moves a route segment to a new position. Continues adding node points to the specified route. Editing Options | 131 . Available for free node points at the end of route segments. Moves a node point in the route to a new position. or repositioned) when editing the route. This option is available on all node points. removed.Fixed Defines whether a selected route node point can change dynamically when the route is edited. Inserts a node point in the selected route. Trims or extends the free pipe ends at a specified length to get the correct engagement for pipes with adjacent fittings. Available for start and end node points in a route that are not used in any other routes or fittings. Edits the hose and adjusts the length by changing the weight of the tangency or tension of the hose segment. search for and select “browser. Otherwise these points remain stationary. The system recalculates the automatic routing based on the new position of the selected node point. with the exception of associated node points and node points for placed fittings.

you can defer automatic updates of tube. When the All Tube & Pipe Objects check box is selected. pipe. 132 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . You can also disable automatic updates for the entire tube and pipe runs subassembly. it defaults to be displayed as populated but not centerlines even when the pipe run is set to Route Object Only. You can see the effect a change has on an individual route before repopulating. To save time for updating the whole tube and pipe assembly. When the Route Objects Only check box is selected. and positional representations. ■ NOTE When a new route is created and populated. routes and runs. For detailed instructions. This is the default setting when new routes and runs are added to a tube and pipe runs assembly. see “Specify the Update and Bill of Materials Behavior” on page 14. All Tube & Pipe Objects: Allows the entire pipe run or specified routes to fully update. The following image shows the Display/Update Settings list you can access on the standard tool bar when a pipe run is activated. and hose components for individual runs and routes. the associated routes and runs are displayed as centerlines. ■ Route Objects Only: Defers automatic updates for the entire pipe run or specified routes.Controlling Individual Display and Update Settings When changes are made to a standard Autodesk Inventor assembly. the associated routes and runs are displayed as populated and automatically respond to changes. the tube and pipe assembly defaults to automatically update. underlying components are hidden and do not respond to changes.

4 Right-click the pipe run or a specific route. Ensure that these settings are only enabled when the Defer All Tube & Pipe Updates check box is cleared on the Tube & Pipe Settings dialog box. and then select Tube & Pipe Settings. you can use the Route tool to close the gap between disjoint segments. activate the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly.To control the display and update setting for individual runs and routes 1 In the AirSystemAssy. and then select the Display/Update Settings tool on the standard toolbar. 5 Select the display and update setting you need. 6 In this book. or click the pipe run or a specific route.iam assembly. While deleting segments. so that you can view automatic responses to edits on routes and runs. You can also use the Route tool to repair disjointed routes. A route is considered finished when you select Finish Edit. Route tool Node Points | 133 . All Tube & Pipe Objects. and then using the Route tool on the end node point. and then select Display/Update Settings. 2 Right-click Tube & Pipe Runs. Node Points Add to Finished Routes New route points can be added to a previously finished route by activating the route to edit. A disjoint route can occur when segments are deleted from a route. 3 Activate the pipe run. use the default setting.

A coupling is added to the node point from which you continued the routing. The new node point becomes the current last node point. 4 Right-click and select Done. 134 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . and select the Route tool on the Route panel bar.To add a point to an existing route 1 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 2. 2 In the graphics window or Model browser. do either of the following: ■ ■ Click the last node point. last node point 3 Add one more point to the route in a location and orientation of your choice. Right-click the last node point. and select the Route tool. 5 Right-click and select Finish Edit. The route resumes at the last selected node point.

Then. 4 Right-click and select Finish Edit. For detailed instructions on how to move segments. 3 Click the route to insert a node point. see “Route Segments” on page 139. You can experiment by dragging various segments on different routes to see how they move. and then drag the same segments to see the different in movement. cancel the selection of several fixed node points so they are updated dynamically. Node Points | 135 . manually created node points are fixed by default and do not update dynamically when the system recalculates the route because of changes to adjacent segments. To change manually created route points to automatically update 1 Activate a tube or pipe route that contains manually created node points. A coupling is added to the route in that location. 2 Click the Insert Node tool. 2 Right-click the route node point to change. Insert Node tool To insert intermediate node points 1 Active a tube or pipe route. 3 Right-click and select Finish Edit. and then clear the Fixed check mark. You can change manually created node points so they can update dynamically. Update Manual Route Points Dynamically As mentioned earlier.Insert Intermediate Node Points Intermediate route node points can be added to any route or run as long as they comply with styles.

3 Right-click and select Finish Edit. NOTE If the node point is populated as a tube and pipe fitting. 2 In the graphics window or Model browser. the initially last node point in Pipe Route 2 within Pipe Run 2 from which you started to continue the routing. In this exercise. Segments adjoining the deleted node points reposition or resize to adjust to the change. 136 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . Associative route node points. The route automatically heals.Delete Node Points You can delete the manually created node points when the resultant route complies with the style criteria. for example. right-click the intermediate node point you just inserted manually. You can also delete node points when they are not associated with any geometry in the tube and pipe assembly. Autodesk Inventor Professional automatically closes gaps left by deleted node points. Change Node Point Association Points created by selecting circular geometry or work points are associated to the selected model geometry by default. you turn off association for the node points associated to the IBeam in Pipe Route 2 and Pipe Route 3 in Pipe Run 1. automatically update when changes are made to the model. and then select Delete. To delete manually created node points 1 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 2. deleting the fitting also deleting the underlying node point.

2 Click and drag the I-beam to the right a little bit to see how the routes update. node point Node Points | 137 .To turn off the node point association 1 Active the top-level assembly. The following image shows how the routes associated to the IBeam adjust to the move. 3 Undo the move. right-click the node point as shown in the following image. non associative routes The steel and copper runs are not associated to the I-beam and do not update. 5 In the graphics window or Model browser. 4 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 1. and then clear the Associative check mark.

138 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for Pipe Route 3 to clear the Associative check mark for the node point as shown in the following image.6 Right-click and select Finish. and Pipe Routes 2 and 3 are not updated. non-associative non-associative associative 9 Undo the move before continuing. node point 8 Move the IBeam again.

It also depends on the geometry adjacent to the point you select for the drag operation. Route points that are automatically generated between points on selected geometry update when changes are made to a route.Route Segments Segments and route endpoints can be repositioned dynamically by clicking and dragging the selected geometry to a new location. Move Segment tool Moving Segments in Rigid Routes When moving segments. the Select Other tool appears for you to cycle through and select the solution you need. Route Segments | 139 . the segment or segments in violation turn red. If alternate solutions are available. or click and drag the arrow directly. If the minimum length setting for the style is violated during a drag. Click anywhere on the segment near the direction arrow you need. The movement allowed follows the conditions established by the current style and connection data. points attached to circular geometry or work points. arrows appear on the geometry indicating the directions allowed for the move. By default. As you drag the selected geometry. A tooltip also displays the segment length and the message <Min Pipe Length> in red text. do not update as the route is modified. Not all points affected by the drag operation update. manually created route points. the system re-evaluates and updates adjacent route components. and points that have been set to Fixed. The arrow changes to red indicating that it is the direction being dragged.

Notice how the drag has violated the minimum length requirement. 2 On the Route panel bar. 7 Right-click and select Finish Edit. To end the drag operation.To dynamically edit a route 1 Activate Pipe Route 1 in Pipe Run 1. 140 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . release the cursor. 3 Pause the cursor over the left end of the route until the arrow changes to red. If the point is a coupling or an associated node point. 4 Click and drag the segment until it is almost even with the segment to the right. The movement allowed depends on the geometry closest to the point you select for the drag operation. 5 Click and drag the segment down as far as it goes without violating the minimum and maximum pipe lengths. click the Move Segment tool. 6 Right-click and select Done. the movement is restricted.

use the ESC key to cancel the drag and return to regular editing. You cannot delete a routed fitting unless it is a coupling. Release the cursor to stop the drag. Delete fittings. Replace existing fittings. or by dragging the unwanted node points until they are coincident with an adjacent one. you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Change its orientation. drag the geometry until the node points are coincident with adjacent node points. To remove them. Fittings For a placed fitting or a routed fitting that for which you have changed the fitting diameter. Fittings | 141 . When they are coincident. Restore original fittings.Removing Unwanted Segments or Node Points You can also remove unwanted segments or node points in your route using dynamic editing. You can then delete the extra node points using Delete from the context menu. release the cursor to end the drag and remove the node point. typically elbows and couplings. as well as connection point. The unwanted segment is removed. While you are dragging the segment. Change the fitting node point position on straight rigid segments. Turn fittings associated to the center of the circular geometry on and off.

and then select Edit Fitting Orientation. 4 Optionally. and then select Enter Distance. right-click on the direction axis parallel to the segment. 5 Right-click and select Done.Adjust Fitting Orientation To change the position of a fitting in a route. you change the orientation and connection points on the cross fitting. 3 Use the direction axes and rotation axes to reposition the fitting. to change the connection point. You can also enter a precise orientation angle or distance to reposition the placed fitting. Edit Position tool 142 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . and then select Enter Angle. right-click the cross you placed in the previous exercise. tees. 6 Right-click and select Finish Edit. and then use Select Orientation to set the new connection point. such as node points where coupling. right-click. The 3D Orthogonal Route tool is displayed at the fitting. right-click in the graphics window. such as a 90-degree or 45-degree elbow. You cannot move the node point at where a directional fitting is used. 2 In the graphics window. Adjust Node Point Positions You can move node points on straight rigid segments. To change fitting orientation and connection point 1 Activate Pipe Route 1 in Pipe Run 1. use the Edit Fitting Orientation tool to define a new position along the segment as long as it remains within the minimum pipe length requirements. In this exercise. ■ ■ For exact rotation. along the underlying 3D sketch of the route. For exact position. or crosses are used.

5 Right-click and select Finish Edit. The cross fitting changes to a coupling fitting at the same position. and then select the Edit Position tool. To restore a default fitting 1 Activate Pipe Run 2.To adjust node point positions 1 Activate Pipe Route 1 in Pipe Run 2. Restore a Default Fitting Using the Restore Fitting tool. 2 Right-click the cross fitting. For exact placement. right-click. 4 Right-click and select Done. Fittings | 143 . you can restore the placed fitting to a coupling or an elbow no matter how many connection points the placed fitting has. 2 Right-click the last node point. and then select Enter Distance to enter a precise value. and then select Restore Fitting. 3 Select a point along a red direction axis to move the node point to a new position.

Replace Existing Fittings You can replace one occurrence of a selected fitting instance with a new fitting instance from the Content Center or all occurrences at one step.11 Tee Threaded . fittings that are created between two collinear straight segments and are associated to model geometry can be turned off. 3 Navigate to and select Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Tee ➤ ASME B16. The Content Center dialog box displays the fitting that is highlighted in the graphics window or Model browser. 5 Right-click and select Done. Turn Off Fittings While editing a route.Class 3000 (1/2 ND) in the Content Center. you only have one occurrence of the cross fitting so you see no difference. 4 Do either of the following: ■ ■ To replace the highlighted fitting only. 144 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . and select Find in Content Center. The replacement fittings can be inserted at previously defined route node points. 6 Right-click and select Finish Edit. To replace all occurrences in the highlighted fitting type. click Replace. In this exercise. To replace existing fittings 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. When a fitting is turned off. the fittings used to route through the I-beam in Pipe Route 2 and Pipe Route 3 in Pipe Run 1 are not needed. the route node point locates a segment instead of a fitting. but must remain associated to the I-beam. The cross fitting is replaced with the tee fitting. 2 Right-click the coupling fitting you just restored. In this tube and pipe system. click Replace All. and the node remains associated with the object in the assembly.

and then repeat Steps 2 through 4 to turn off the coupling fitting. In this exercise. The pipe fitting is not displayed. Right-click the node point and select the Associative check mark.In this exercise. use the Edit Fitting Orientation tool to rotate the free fitting or component to a new orientation. 2 Make sure the underlying node point for the coupling fitting is associative to the IBeam. and then adjust the hose route and connect to another tee fitting you placed on the upper segment of Pipe Route 1 in Pipe Run 1. you delete the connection between the tee fitting and the hose route. Connections | 145 . After the connection is created. You can also connect fittings being dropped from the Content Center or being placed using the Place Fitting tool to another component. 4 Right-click. you turn the coupling fittings off in the two routes. 3 Right-click the node point and clear the Fitting check mark. 5 Activate Pipe Route 3 in Pipe Run 1. but the association with the IBeam remains. Connections Fitting connections are used to maintain the fixed relationship between components in a tube and pipe assembly. You can connect fittings or normal Autodesk Inventor components that already exist in the tube and pipe assembly to other components. You can break connections to edit the fitting connections independently and accommodate more changes to the tube and pipe run assembly. coupling fittings To turn fittings off 1 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 1. and then select Finish Edit.

146 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . By dropping a fitting on the end of a pipe segment or adjacent to other fittings. and click Delete. select Parker Female Thread . The Edit Connections dialog box is displayed with all existing connections on the tee fitting. 3 In the connections list. 2 Right-click the tee fitting as shown in the following image.Swivel 5/16 x 1/2-20 UNF:2. The connection with the hose fitting changes to no connection. and select Edit Fitting Connections. 4 Click OK.Delete Fitting Connections You can delete fitting connections and edit the engagement when they are formed: ■ ■ By using the Connect Fittings tool. including two pipe segments and one hose fitting. To delete fitting connections 1 Activate Pipe Run 1.

Can be a fitting. it is always positioned relative to the base fitting during updates and other operations. or a normal Autodesk Inventor part that already exists in the assembly to another base component. or a normal Inventor part that is located anywhere within the assembly. You also specify the engagement type. It specifies the connection that constrains the position and routing of the free fitting.Connect Fittings and Components Connect Fittings tool Use the Connect Fittings tool to connect two components relative to one another in a tube and pipe assembly. You can connect a fitting. Once the free fitting is connected to the base component. as well as the engagement distance when the User Defined is selected from the Engagement list. To complete the connection. a conduit part. You can also connect fittings before placing or dropping them in the graphics window. Base Fitting Connections | 147 . Free fitting Can be a fitting or a normal Autodesk Inventor part in the active pipe run assembly that is not driven by a node in a route or by any other fitting. you must have one free fitting and one base fitting as specified in the following image. a conduit part.

User-defined: A positive number moves the free fitting or component away from the connected base fitting or component. Male Fitting: Uses the male fitting engagement type for the selected connection. The hose route recalculates the hose length. and select Delete. 148 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . you connect the hose route to another tee fitting you manually placed. 4 Right-click and select Finish Edit. do the following to adjust the hose route: 2 Expand the Flexible Hose 2 assembly in Pipe Run 1. The hose route is flexible and acts as the free fitting To connect fittings and components 1 Activate Pipe Run 1. Read-write only when the User Defined engagement type is used. and then activate the hose route. 3 Right-click the intermediate Work Point 2.Engagement Available only when you select a connection between two fittings or between a component and a fitting that was inserted using the Connect Fitting tool. The Pipe Run 1 is activated. Before connecting the hose route to another tee fitting. In this exercise. Distance Indicates the engagement distance used for the connection between fittings and components. A negative number moves the free fitting or component toward the connected base fitting or component. It includes three engagement types: ■ ■ ■ Female Fitting: Uses the female fitting engagement type for the selected connection.

ensure the Free Fitting tool is selected. 10 In the graphics window or Model browser. 8 Select Female Fitting as the engagement type.5 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. Right-click in the graphics window and select Isometric View. click the Connection Fittings tool. The hose route is recomputed. right-click the unconnected tee on the downward segment. and then click the tee fitting on the upper segment. Click the hose fitting. Connections | 149 . 6 In the Connect Fittings dialog box. The tee fitting is no longer needed so you delete it. and select Delete. 7 Click the Base Fitting tool. 9 Click Apply or OK to set the connection. The pipe segment automatically heals. Your assembly should look like the following image.

Edit position. Changing Bend Radius The radius dimension is displayed for each bend in a tube run by default. you can also edit the bend radius and move coupling nodes. bend radius 150 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . In addition. To edit the bend radius on individual nodes. The adjoining bends change their included angle to make the new route possible. behaves differently for tube runs. No new segments are introduced. 2 Double-click the bend radius dimension as shown in the following image. To change bend radius on individual nodes 1 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 2.Editing Bent Tube Routes All editing options work for bent tube runs. you edit dimensions. however. You can change the bend radius for selected nodes in the active route. When moving a tube segment. both adjacent points are moved by the same distance and direction.

75 inch as the new value. Editing Bent Tube Routes | 151 . 4 Right-click and select Finish Edit. and click Update.3 Enter 0. The radius changes for that node only. Enter the new bend radius. and then double-click the bend radius dimension. and then click the green check mark. NOTE Alternatively. you can choose Select Sketch Features from the Select tool on the standard toolbar while the top-level assembly is activated.

and select 3D Move/Rotate. The adjacent bends are modified accordingly. 152 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs .Moving a Coupling Node In tube routes you can move coupling nodes in three dimensions. 4 Right-click and select Finish Edit. 2 Right-click the node point as shown in the following image. coupling node point 3 Move the point to the right to achieve the results shown in the following figure. Moving the point off the segment axis deletes the coupling and inserts a bend. To move the coupling node 1 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 2.

2 Right-click the pipe run to delete. When you delete a populated route. and select Delete Run. To delete a run 1 Activate Tube & Pipe Runs in a tube and pipe assembly. Fittings that are not deleted are placed above the first route in the active run.Your assembly should look like the following image. Deleting Routes and Runs | 153 . you must also indicate whether to delete the segments and fittings that it contains or to save the fittings for future routing. You can also delete one or more selected routes. Deleting Routes and Runs You can delete a selected run or any individual routes that it contains.

If the routes to delete are populated. the Delete Route Components dialog box displays. To delete segments and keep the fittings.To delete a route and its components 1 Activate the run containing the route to delete. 154 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . 2 In the Model browser. right-click the route and select Delete. click the button beside Fittings and Segments of Selected Route. 4 Right-click and select Finish Edit. click the button beside Segments of Selected Route. 3 Do either of the following: ■ ■ To delete both segments and fittings.

recover route centerlines. In this chapter. you learn how to create drawing views for individual pipe runs.Documenting Routes and Runs In This Chapter 7 Drawing views. dimension routes and runs. and the Bill of Materials table specific to Tube & Pipe Add-in are used to describe individual pipe runs and components. ■ About documenting routes and runs ■ Using drawing templates ■ Preparing design view representations ■ Creating drawing views ■ Recovering route centerlines ■ Dimensioning drawing views ■ Creating parts lists and bill of materials 155 . and add the pipe length (BASE QTY) and raw material description (STOCK NUMBER) properties to parts lists and the Bill of Materials table. parts lists.

you may need to do the following: ■ If you are migrating R9 or earlier tube and pipe drawing documents to the current version of Autodesk Inventor Professional. and then apply them to appropriate drawing views. Tube and pipe information is treated like other parts and subassemblies and can be detailed using normal drawing manager methods and tools unless noted otherwise. you can recover route centerlines. In this exercise. To document individual routes and runs. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE To dimension unpopulated routes. To create tube and pipe drawings correctly. you use the new BOM. To dimension routes and runs correctly. create design view representations in which you turn off the visibility of unnecessary components. Use detail views to show selected fittings. Add the Pipe Length and Stock Number properties to parts lists and Bill of Materials table. 156 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . Use broken views to fit long nondescript sections of pipe on a drawing. determine the BOM to use. recover route centerlines. Those drawings can describe the documentation for individual pipe runs and components.About Documenting Routes and Runs Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe provides drawing templates specific to the Tube & Pipe Add-in.

each new drawing file uses the drawing template specific to Autodesk Inventor Professional. you may need to follow the workflow. 2 Edit design views for the drawing file if you want to output specific views. depending on specific working environment. and workflow used. For more information about customizing Autodesk Inventor Professional drawing templates. To document a tube and pipe assembly 1 Create a tube and pipe assembly containing populated or unpopulated routes. original assembly. especially in some complicated assemblies. 8 Add balloons to the pipe run components. Drawings and Representations section. NOTE The results in your exercise may differ from figures illustrated in this chapter. 7 Create a parts list. Using Drawing Templates When documenting a tube and pipe assembly. which is stored in the Autodesk Inventor installation location. 4 Create one or more base views. By default. edit drawing templates. it is under Program Files ➤Autodesk ➤ Inventor 10 ➤ Templates ➤ Professional. 6 Recover route centerlines and dimension routes and runs. 3 Optionally. 5 Create other required views from the base view or any available parent views.General Workflow for Documenting Pipe Runs To document a tube and pipe assembly. refer to Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe Help. Using Drawing Templates | 157 . You can update existing templates or create and add new ones into the Templates folder.

158 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs .iam. It can be mapped to drawing views of the assembly file. Especially when only specific pipe runs in a complicated assembly need to be documented. Thus.Preparing Design View Representations Design View is created in the assembly environment and preserves a designated representation view of assembly components. you create a design view in which you turn off the visibility of IBeam in the tube and pipe assembly. Create New Design Views Before creating drawing views for pipe runs. components with Visibility off are not displayed in the drawing view when the relevant design view is selected for the drawing file. you can customize specific design views for in the assembly environment using the Design View Representations tool. you can define a specific design view in which components that are contained in the top-level assembly but not within the pipe runs are hidden. Design View Representations tool In this exercise. AirSystemAssy.

8 Save the top-level assembly.iam assembly. accept the default public storage location. and then clear the Visibility check mark. The new Pipe_Run design view is active by default. 2 At the top of the Model browser. and click New. Pipe_Run is used to create drawing views for the tube and pipe assembly in the later exercises. 6 In the Model browser.To create a new design view 1 Open the AirSystemAssy. The association with the design view can be changed after the drawing view is created. Pipe_Run. 7 Turn off the visibility of Pipe Run 2. 3 In the Design View Representations dialog box. right-click the IBeam:1. NOTE You can set the association with the design view when creating a drawing view. click the Design View Representations tool. or select Private and specify your own storage location. When associations are set. In this case. 5 Close the dialog box. 4 Enter a Design View name. You can also define any other assembly viewing characteristics. Preparing Design View Representations | 159 . it is possible to update the drawing view automatically when changes are made to the assembly in the selected design view.

ew ew ew ew iew Vi Vi t Vi ew Vi w V d ut iew ee rd Vi y iew e a r y te n Sh Vi il V ken kO tV io rl a bo ilia ec j ta e w il x af se ct o ea o v a e De Ba Se Br Br O Pr Au Dr N N The following figure shows the completed drawing views: 160 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . and detail view for a tube and pipe assembly you created previously.Creating Drawing Views In this exercise. projected view. use the Drawing Views panel bar to create a base view.

2 On the File menu. Professional tab.Create Base Views Before creating other drawing views.idw and then click OK. click New. select Standard_AIP. 3 In the Open dialog box. Make sure your assembly is in the Isometric View mode as shown. Base View tool To create a base view for a tube and pipe assembly 1 Open the AirSystemAssy.iam assembly. you must first create at least one base view. Creating Drawing Views | 161 . such as projected views and detail views. Make sure you have the Pipe_Run design view active for the tube and pipe assembly in which the IBeam and Pipe Run 2 are not visible.

The Drawing View dialog box displays.idw. 5 Click the Base View tool.The Drawing environment is activated. the drawing document is stored in the root location of the active project work space. Examine the Model browser. 162 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . 4 Save the drawing document as AirSystemAssy. using the <assembly> prefix. The IBeam and Pipe Run 2 have visibility turned off. By default.

Design View: Pipe_Run.iam If an assembly is already opened. Associative The active design view for the assembly is selected by default. Component tab. Options tab. Creating Drawing Views | 163 .25. The drawing view automatically updates when the component visibility in the associated design view changes. You can click Browse to locate the assembly that you need. 8 Move the preview to the upper-left quadrant of the drawing sheet.6 In the Drawing View dialog box. specify: File: C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor 10\Tutorial Files\AirSystemAssy. and then click to place the view. Visible Label: View1. NOTE If you click OK in the dialog box instead. Scale: 0. the view may be placed in a random location. it is selected by default. Visible Orientation: Front Style: Hidden Line 7 In the Drawing View dialog box. use the defaults. 9 Save the drawing document. You can move the view by clicking inside the blank area and dragging the rectangular border of the view.

When a projected view is placed in the drawing sheet. project a right view from the base view you just created. You can change its default inherited relationship with the parent view to activate more settings. some drawing view settings. Associative Scale: Scale from Base. and then click to set the view location. Visible Style: Style from Base 164 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . and select Edit View. 6 In the Drawing View dialog box. 5 To edit the projected view properties. specify: Design View: Pipe_Run. Projected View tool Now. 3 Move the preview to the upper-right quadrant of the drawing sheet. 2 Click inside View1 that is used as the parent view. right-click inside the projected view. NOTE In the Drawing View dialog box displayed. click the Projected View tool. A black rectangular border appears. The back projected view is in place now. To create a projected view 1 On the Drawing Views panel bar. 4 Right-click and select Create. such as File and Style.Create Projected Views Projected views can be created on any drawing views. Visible Label: View2. are disabled because the projected view respects the parent view. you can edit the projected view properties using the Edit View tool on the context menu.

Detail View tool To add a detail view 1 On the Drawing Views panel bar. 2 Click inside View2 that is used as the parent view. 8 Save the drawing document. The projected view updates to new settings. They can be placed anywhere in the drawing sheet. The Detail View dialog box displays.7 Click OK. click the Detail View tool. Creating Drawing Views | 165 . Create Detail Views Detail views do not respect the drawing view settings from the parent view.

Visible Style: Hidden Line 4 Click OK. specify: Label: A.3 In the Detail View dialog box.5. The circular selection symbol is attached to the cursor. 5 Place the cursor inside the projected view as shown in the preceding image. Click and drag the cursor to include the part of Pipe Route 1 shown in the following image. Visible Scale: 0. 166 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs .

8 Move the cursor over the circular selection tool as shown in the following image. click to activate it. 9 To edit the detail view properties. To move the circular selection tool. and then click to set the detail view. Visible Label: A. Visible Style: Hidden Line Creating Drawing Views | 167 . NOTE If the portion in the detail view is not as desired. verify: Design View: Pipe_Run. click and drag the green center point. Associative Scale: 0. 10 In the Drawing View dialog box. click and drag the circular edge outward or inward. you can use the circular selection tool to adjust the portion.5.6 Click to set the portion of the projected view. The cursor changes to a plus symbol. 7 Move the cursor to the appropriate position. double-click the detail view. The detail view preview is displayed. To change the portion.

168 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . 12 Save the drawing document.11 Click OK.

Move the cursor over the Model browser to highlight each drawing view.Practice Your Skills In this exercise. The following image shows the drawing view structure in the Model browser: ■ ■ The base view (VIEW1) is the parent view of the projected view (VIEW2). The projected view is the parent view of the detail view (A). you learn to recognize the three drawing views you just created. This will make it easier to recover route centerlines in later exercises. VIEW1: base view VIEW2: projected view A: detail view Creating Drawing Views | 169 .

if you have recovered route centerlines in the base view. all recovered centerlines in the active drawing views are deleted so associated dimensions may disappear or become incorrect. and then hide the centerlines for the individual runs and routes you do not need. you can dimension routes to the centerlines. You must dimension routes to the centerlines in drawing views. To add or remove centerlines for other Autodesk Inventor components in a standard assembly. you can manually recover them for drawing views you need. When the specified route centerlines are recovered. the drawing manager hides the centerlines of tube. Centerline recovery is used to control the availability of the route centerlines in active tube and pipe drawing views for dimensioning. include route centerlines for the entire tube and pipe runs assembly. and hose routes in drawing views. Drawing tab.Recovering Route Centerlines By default. For example. individual run. the route centerline in drawing views has the same centerline recovery setting as the parent. If you change the centerline recovery back. 170 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . dependent on the amount of dimensioning you need. In drawing views that are created from the base view. You can control the centerline recovery at the tube and pipe runs assembly. otherwise. the relevant route centerlines are automatically recovered in all associated drawing views that are subsequently created. the route centerline visibility respects the setting in the base view. or individual route levels in the active drawing view. change the Automated Centerline Settings on the Tools. pipe. When route centerlines are not recovered in the base view. Document Settings. you the dimensions may be incorrect. For example. NOTE When a new route or run is created. when dimensioning all or most of the routes and runs in a tube and pipe assembly.

and select Include Route Centerlines. Recovering Route Centerlines | 171 .To recover route centerlines in the detailed view (DETAIL: A) 1 In the Model browser. navigate to Pipe Run 1 as shown below. The route centerlines are recovered as highlighted in the following image. 2 Right-click Pipe Route 1. under Sheet 1.

You can then retrieve them to display the overall dimensions of pipe runs. baseline dimensions. Added in the drawing view for further documentation using the General Dimension tool on the Drawing Annotation panel bar. It does not affect features or parts. You can add general dimensions. Drawing dimension The following image shows the Drawing Annotation panel bar on which you can use tools to add dimensions. and so on. Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe can access the model dimensions of components and place them in a drawing view. t t Se Se n n on sion sio nsio ensi en si en e en m i m Di m Di m Di m i e e l D ne D ne a at at li li er in in en Base Base Ord Ord G on 172 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs .Dimensioning Drawing Views There are two types of dimensions for documenting the drawing views of the tube and pipe assemblies: Model dimension Controls the features that are applied during sketching or creation of the feature. ordinate dimensions.

and then drag to set the dimension. 3 Click the intersection point of two route centerlines and the point on the valve as shown in the following images. For more information on dimensioning.idw.In the following exercises. refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help. Dimensioning Drawing Views | 173 . click the General Dimension tool. Drawing Annotations. 5 Save the drawing document. 2 On the Drawing Annotation panel bar. AirSystemAssy. you learn to add general dimensions in the detail view (VIEW3). Dimensions section. 4 Press Esc to exit the command. General Dimension tool To add general drawing dimensions 1 Open the drawing document.

you create a parts list for the base view (VIEW1). These properties provide the information needed for manufacturing. Parts List tool Column Chooser tool Keep in mind that when you set them as key columns to group conduit parts.Creating Parts Lists and Bill of Materials For tube and pipe design. 174 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . The drawing manager always groups parts using the Part Number property even if you remove it from the parts list. Parts Lists Since Base QTY and Stock Number are not selected into the default parts list style parts lists do not include those properties the first time you create them. you may need to include pipe length (BASE QTY) and raw material description (Stock Number) properties in the parts lists and Bill of Materials table. you may not receive the expected results for the following reasons: ■ ■ Each conduit part in the current version of Autodesk Inventor Professional has a unique part number. In this exercise. use the Column Chooser tool to add the BASE QTY and STOCK NUMBER properties to the parts lists.

For detailed instructions on how to use the Style Editor tool. and then click Add. The Parts List Column Chooser dialog box displays. 6 Optionally. 4 In the Available Properties list. select Base QTY and Stock Number. 3 In the Edit Parts List dialog box. 5 Click OK.To add to an individual parts list 1 On the Drawing Annotation panel bar. you can add the BASE QTY and STOCK NUMBER properties to the parts list style. columns“ in the Autodesk Inventor Help index. use the Parts List tool to create a Parts Only parts list for the base view (VIEW1). right-click a parts list and select Edit Parts List. NOTE Using the Style Editor tool. The selected parts list automatically updates. click the Column Chooser tool. 2 In the graphics window or Model browser. search for and select “parts lists. The BASE QTY and STOCK NUMBER columns are added. 7 Save the drawing document. Creating Parts Lists and Bill of Materials | 175 . use the Group Settings tool to group parts list rows based on the BASE QTY and STOCK NUMBER.

3 On the toolbar. a parts list. and then select Choose Columns. Click the Bill of Materials tool. drag Base QTY and Stock Number to the Bill of Materials table head. 5 Click Done. 2 In the Bill of Materials dialog box. 4 From within the Customization list. right-click a drawing view. or the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly or a pipe run within a drawing view. Bill of Materials tool To add to Bill of Materials table 1 In the drawing window or Model browser.Bill of Materials When the Bill of Materials table does not contain the BASE QTY and STOCK NUMBER properties. 6 Save the drawing document. click the arrow next to the Choose Columns & New iProperties tool. click the Structured or Parts Only tab. you can use the Choose Columns and New iProperties ➤ Choose Columns tool to drag them to the table. 176 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs .

177 .Part 2 Cable and Harness Part 2 of this manual presents the getting started information for Autodesk Inventor® Professional Cable and Harness. This add-in provides tools for creating and manipulating three-dimensional wire harnesses in the context of a standard Autodesk Inventor Assembly.

178 | .

■ Introduction ■ User prerequisites ■ Backing up the sample files ■ Exercise setup ■ About electrical parts ■ Workflow ■ Placing pins and pin properties ■ Setting the unique identifier ■ Electrical part properties ■ Modifying pinned parts ■ Adding custom properties ■ Placing electrical parts 179 .Getting Started with Cable and Harness In This Chapter 8 This chapter provides basic information and exercises to help you get started with Autodesk Inventor® Professional Cable and Harness. You also learn how to identify and label connection points on an electrical component and set properties for the pin and the part.

and routing wires through mechanical assembly designs. connecting. Create and annotate basic drawings. sketch. At a minimum. you use files that contain the example geometry or parts for that task.0. use the integrated Design Support System (DSS) for access to online documentation and tutorials. part modeling. For Cable and Harness the files are located in the Cable & Harness ➤Tutorial Files folder where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional. It is also recommended that you have a working knowledge of Microsoft® Windows NT® 4. 180 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . You can revert to these files if you make any mistakes during the exercises. Edit a component in place. Before you begin the exercises. Create. and drawing environments and browsers. Place and constrain parts in an assembly. it is recommended that you understand how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Use the assembly. or Windows® XP. Understanding Prerequisites It is assumed that you have a working knowledge of the Autodesk Inventor interface and tools. back up the files so the originals are always available. If you do not. Set color styles and use the Style Editor.About Cable and Harness Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness provides tools for creating and manipulating three-dimensional wire harnesses in the context of a standard Autodesk Inventor assembly. or if you would like to repeat an exercise. and complete the exercises in the Autodesk Inventor Getting Started manual. Backing Up Tutorial Data Files For each exercise in this section. and manipulate work points and work features. Windows® 2000. and a working knowledge of concepts for setting up. These files are included in the Tutorial Files directory for each application. constrain.

Setting Up Projects For Exercises | 181 . browse to and select the EnclosureAssembly. The default installation location is Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional (version). and pins can be moved. but electrical part properties are not available. however. the harness subassembly and the data it contains is read-only.To back up the tutorial files 1 In the folder where Autodesk Inventor Professional is installed. and new cable and harness components cannot be added. This means that the geometry of the harness components is visible through Autodesk Inventor. 2 Open Cable & Harness ➤ Tutorial Files. Setting Up Projects For Exercises For the exercises. can be edited. Working in Autodesk Inventor Installations If Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness is not installed on the system viewing the harness data. Now you can use the files in the Tutorial Files folders as you work through the exercises in this book. and copy the exercise data into your new folder. Electrical parts. The default installation location is Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional (version)\Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files. Keep any files you create for an exercise in the Tutorial Files directory to avoid the possibility of file resolution problems. but the components cannot be edited.ipj as the active project. go to the Cable & Harness directory and create a new folder called Exercise_Backup.

as long as there is some geometry to designate the connection points. 5 Place the part in an assembly. To create an electrical part and place it in an assembly 1 Edit an existing Autodesk Inventor part. 3 Add pin definitions. The reference designator for the occurrence is required in each harness assembly that is created. if appropriate. Electrical parts are the only harness components that are not created in the context of a harness assembly. Workflow for Electrical Parts The harness workflow begins with electrical parts. provide a placeholder reference designator (RefDes) or generic value for that electrical part type in the part file. and optionally add additional custom properties. Do this once for each electrical part. These pins are the attach points for the wires in the harness assembly. electrical parts are created by editing normal Autodesk Inventor parts. Once defined. the electrical part is placed in an assembly. or pins. The following are the basic steps to create an electrical part and place it in an assembly. For example. While editing the parts you identify the special work points called pins. the part could be a simple plane with work points representing the pins. 4 Optionally. Instead. not just once on each part occurrence. each with a unique name and additional properties. provide required properties. The part used can be fully modeled or a simple representation of the part. known as pins.About Electrical Parts Electrical parts are normal Autodesk Inventor® parts or iParts with extended properties and one or more defined connection points. 2 Switch to the Harness Part Feature panel bar. 182 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . 6 Assign the reference designator for the occurrence.

include any one of the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Existing work points Center points on any circular component such as a face. Start by opening an assembly in the Default project. a hole.Creating Electrical Parts Use the Harness Part Features panel bar to add pins and the reference designator placeholder. The reference designator and pins are specified while editing the part file or editing the part in place. Valid geometry for pin selections includes both associative and non associative points. They do not update if the geometry changes. Creating Electrical Parts | 183 . By default. Nonassociative points are arbitrary points on any face. the pin name is a sequential number starting with 1. the connectors are already placed in the assembly. For your convenience. In this exercise. and cylindrical cuts or arc edges Existing sketch points Model vertices Each pin must have a unique name. The points you select determine whether the pins are updated if the geometry to which they are associated changes. Associative points. which update as the geometry is changed. Harness Properties Place Pin Place Pins and Define Pin-level Properties A connector can contain one or more pins. you edit the part in place to add pins and a placeholder reference designator to a part.

The default location is Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional (version)\ Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files. select the file named Enclosure_Assembly.To open the assembly 1 Open Autodesk Inventor® Professional if it is not already open.ipj project is the active project. and click File ➤ New. 4 From the list. 184 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . The assembly looks like the following image.iam. 2 Click Projects in the What To Do pane of the Open dialog box to verify the EnclosureAssembly. 3 Click Open and browse to Cable & Harness ➤ Tutorial Files in the folder where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional.

move the cursor over the part geometry to highlight valid points for your selection. 5 In the graphics window. double-click the part name to select the part for editing. and then select Harness Part Features. pause the cursor over the part named 360124. circular edge Creating Electrical Parts | 185 . part 360124 2 In the browser. and then click to select the center point. Turn visibility off for any parts obstructing your view. Place Pin tool 4 Rotate and zoom the view to see the part as shown below. 3 Click the arrow in the Part Features title bar. Click the Place Pin tool. This highlights the part in the graphics window so that you can see the part to edit. 6 Highlight the circular edge shown below.To add pins in the assembly 1 In the browser.

Click the check mark button. The work point representing the pin appears for pin 1. do not add any additional properties for the pin. 186 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . pin 1 11 Define a pin for hole 2: ■ ■ ■ Highlight the circular edge. Accept the Pin Name of 2. use the default pin name of 1.7 In the Pin Name dialog box. 10 Click OK to close the dialog box. For this exercise. Harness Properties button 9 Click the Custom tab to see where custom properties are added. 8 Click the Harness Properties button to display the entire Pin Properties dialog box.

The reference designator. For example. Additional custom properties can also be added to the part. and U3. pins defined at each hole 13 Right-click. Custom properties are used to provide specific information to downstream processes such as reporting. The pin name specified is also the name of the special work point feature listed in the browser. if a certain RS232 connector occurs in an assembly multiple times. or RefDes. Custom properties such as the vendor and vendor part number. and so on. often come from the data book for the component. each occurrence must have a unique identifier. Typically a placeholder identifier. you can set a value for the placeholder reference designator property. is a unique identifier that maps the part to the schematic design. such as U1. For example. Creating Electrical Parts | 187 . Note that each pin name within the selected part is unique. Set Part Properties Specific property data must be added to a part to provide a complete electrical definition.12 Repeat Step 11 to define a pin at each hole. If appropriate. and then a specific identifier is added for each occurrence of the part in the context of the assembly. such as U? is added in the part environment. These properties are also visible on the part occurrence in the assembly. Name the pins to match their number label. U2. enter a Pin Name of 3 for the hole labeled as 3. and then select Done to exit Place Pin mode. The part name and part number are automatically set based on the part file name and the Autodesk Inventor part number.

2 5 8 part with all pins defined 2 Add the reference designator U?. To add a RefDes placeholder 1 With nothing selected. right-click the part in the browser. consider creating a template for electrical parts that contains placeholders for commonly used properties. 3 Click OK on the dialog box. Add RefDes Placeholders In this exercise. you set the RefDes value for the occurrences. 3 In the browser. and add pins at each hole. In this case. select the Harness Properties tool from the Harness Part Features panel bar. and then select Harness Properties from the context menu. 188 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . 2 On the General tab of the Part properties dialog box. In a later exercise. enter the placeholder U?. Alternatively. Practice Your Skills Use the skills you just learned to add pins and a RefDes placeholder to the other electrical parts. you add a placeholder RefDes to the electrical part. and then click OK on the message box. 1 Edit the part 360575:1.To save time on data entry and reduce entry errors. 4 Click File ➤ Save to save your changes. enter a reference designator (RefDes). expand the PCB subassembly to locate and edit part LTP. Name the pins to match their number label.

Modifying Pinned Parts Once an electrical part is defined. You only need to pin the part once and all occurrences inherit the pins. 7 Click File ➤ Save to save your work. To reattach a dangling wire move the wire to another pin using Edit Wire from the context menu. You can place or project work points onto part faces. edit part 360575:2 and notice how this occurrence inherits the pins set in 360575:1. Delete selected pins. circles. 3D Move/Rotate. right-click Pin 5. Pin 1 is the pin closest to part 360124. you create the geometry used to define the pin. In this exercise. linear edges. Work points can also be constrained to the center points of arcs. Delete Pins Pins that are no longer needed can be deleted. Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 5 Specify the reference designator J?. you delete a pin on an electrical part you created earlier. Modifying Pinned Parts | 189 . When modifying pins using Redefine Feature. it can be modified in several ways. Modify pins using standard Autodesk Inventor work point operations (Ground. and then select Delete from the context menu. To delete a pin 1 Edit part 360124 in place. 2 In the browser or graphics window. You can: ■ ■ ■ Add or modify electrical properties on both the parts and pins. NOTE Any wires attached to a deleted pin dangle.4 Add the pins as shown. Redefine Feature). and ellipses. 6 In the browser. or an arc or circle.

and the dialog box is closed. and enter the properties as follows: Name: Vendor Type: Text Value: AMP 3 Click the Add button. Each data type. right-click. Each custom property requires a data type. you add a custom property to a part. you set a specific reference designator for each occurrence of that part in the context of each harness assembly. depending on how you prefer to document the harness assembly. except for text. like a mating connector. 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to add the same Vendor property to the electrical parts LTP and 360575:1.Adding Custom Properties to Parts In this exercise. may not belong in the harness assembly. Connectors that already reside within subassemblies can remain there. They can be placed outside of the harness assembly or demoted into the harness assembly. 190 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . Once placed. in the browser. select 360124:1. 2 Click the Custom tab. and then click OK. If the connector is physically part of the harness. Electrical parts can be placed anywhere below a harness assembly or parent assembly. has a default unit associated with it. To add custom properties to a part 1 While still editing part 360124. with a harness assembly added. Placing Electrical Parts You place and constrain electrical parts in an assembly just as you place and constrain standard Autodesk Inventor parts. An object such as a terminal block that is not part of the harness. and then select Harness Properties from the context menu. consider adding it directly to the appropriate harness assembly. The property is added to the list.

you can use Save Copy As to copy the top-level assembly and all that it contains (the harness assembly. other subassemblies and so on) and reuse it in another assembly. Placing Electrical Parts | 191 . You set the reference designator for each part occurrence after the harness assembly is added in the next chapter. From within Autodesk Inventor Professional. the four electrical parts you created earlier have already been placed for you. In this assembly.If reusing a top-level assembly that contains a harness assembly. it is recommended that you demote the electrical parts into the harness assembly.

192 .

It also tells how to create a harness assembly and set properties. ■ Introduction ■ Cable and harness environment ■ General workflow ■ Creating harness assemblies ■ Cable and harness browser ■ Properties in cable and harness ■ Assign the occurrence RefDes 193 .Working With Harness Assemblies In This Chapter 9 This chapter provides basic information about the tools added by the cable and harness environment.

For example. splices. inserting wires and cables from a library. wires. With the cable and harness tools you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create or edit harness assembly files. Insert and arrange splices and make other modifications to the harness design. The harness assembly information can also be represented in drawings or nailboard drawings. Use the browser to organize and edit electrical parts. Edit and retrieve wire and cable definitions from a library. Allocate space by defining possible wire and cable paths through the assembly. cables. Route wires and cables through harness segments and automatically calculate lengths and bundle diameters. or configured to your specific needs. 194 | Chapter 9 Working with Harness Assemblies . WARNING! Do not perform operations specific to Autodesk Inventor on segments. and others should not be used to change harness objects. and cables as it could cause problems with operations in cable and harness. Import electrical connectivity wire lists (including cable wires) from files.About Working in Harness Assemblies The Autodesk Inventor® Professional Cable and Harness software includes features for defining electrical parts. Create electrical parts. It can also be saved to an XML format. and segments. routing wires through segment paths. sweeps. and inserting splices. Create accurate 2D harness documentation with intelligent properties and dimensions that automatically update as the 3D design changes. Inventor operations such as extrusions. Reports can be generated for several common report types. and to change their visibility. wires. Configure and generate reports of the harness assembly.

Cable and Harness Environment The tools provided in the cable and harness software are integrated with the standard Autodesk Inventor assembly environment. Cable & Harness Panel Bar Main menu Segment. and the Cable and Harness panel bar and browser are enabled. and cable display tools Browser Toolbar Cable & Harness browser items Need to reshoot this when visualization tools are in interface and browser icons are in. wire. Tools specific to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness software are added to the standard Autodesk Inventor toolbar. The following illustration shows the application window that is displayed when a harness assembly is active. About Working in Harness Assemblies | 195 .

) Activated by selecting the Nailboard tool from the Cable and Harness panel bar. the Cable and Harness browser items include the contents of one or more harness assemblies in a hierarchy. Contained in the Model browser.) Segment and wire display tools Harness Part Features panel bar Nailboard panel bar Nailboard View tool Cable and Harness also adds electrical data types and units unique to the electrical domain. you must create the harness assembly. Use this tool to create a nailboard from an open drawing. this panel bar contains the tool set for creating electrical parts. To begin designing a harness in your assembly model.) The Nailboard View tool is added to the standard Autodesk Inventor Drawing Views Panel. (Not displayed. (Not displayed. the assembly environment is displayed. Use the panel bar title to switch between the Cable & Harness and Assembly panel bars. 196 | Chapter 9 Working with Harness Assemblies . The harness assemblies act as containers for all the objects created or placed in that particular harness.The features added by the cable and harness environment include: Cable & Harness panel bar Cable and Harness Browser items The tool set for the cable and harness environment. Activated by editing normal Autodesk Inventor parts. Creating Harness Assemblies When an assembly file is first opened in Autodesk Inventor Professional. (Not displayed. This panel bar contains the tool set for manipulating and annotating a 2D representation of the 3D harness. Switches between rendered and centerline display for wires and segments. Use the panel bar title to switch between the Harness Part Features and the Part Features panel bar. A standard Autodesk Inventor assembly can contain multiple harness assemblies.

the system adds a harness assembly to the browser. Create Harness tool In the Create harness assembly dialog box. cables. To create the Harness assembly. and then add properties as needed.Workflow for Harness Components The following are the basic steps to place and create harness objects such as wires. add wire and cable points. and segments in an assembly: 1 Create electrical (pinned) parts. Keep in mind that when you edit a harness assembly you can connect only to harness objects that share the same parent assembly as that harness assembly. 6 Create segments that define the possible wire and cable paths through the assembly. Creating Harness Assemblies | 197 . and is saved to the location of the open assembly file.iam (where 1234567891098 is an incremental number that varies with each harness assembly). along with the corresponding harness part. provide a unique name and location for the harness subassembly. 5 Insert wires and cables into the harness assembly. You can locate the harness anywhere in the assembly hierarchy. 7 Add properties to the segments as needed. 10 Create a nailboard of the harness assembly. 4 Create the harness assembly. It is added to the browser along with other placed components and is arranged in the order it is added to the assembly. You can provide a different name and location if appropriate. 2 Open the Autodesk Inventor assembly file in which the harness will be created or exists. but not in another harness assembly. 9 Insert splices. you can nest the harness assembly in another standard Autodesk Inventor assembly. For example.1234567891098. and make other modifications to the harness. By default. adding properties as needed. except in another harness assembly. 3 Place and constrain electrical parts in the assembly. Once you provide the name and location. the file is named HA. It is recommended that you change the name to something harness specific or descriptive. 8 Route wires and cables through selected segments. click the Create Harness tool on the Assembly panel bar.

select the Create Harness tool. display tools.iam.iam New Harness Location: Enter the path. navigate to and select the file Enclosure_Assembly. you open an existing assembly and prepare to wire it. To create a harness assembly 1 If not already open. 2 On the Assembly panel bar. enter the name for the harness assembly and the location as shown: New Harness Assembly Name: Harness Assembly1. Create Harness tool 3 In the Create Harness dialog box. You also become familiar with the features included in the cable and harness design environment. The assembly is displayed as shown.In this exercise. or browse to Program Files\ Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files 198 | Chapter 9 Working with Harness Assemblies . including the panel bar. and browser.

4 In the Create Harness dialog box, click OK. The system adds the harness assembly to the browser and activates the cable and harness environment. The following illustration shows the Cable & Harness panel bar.
i re tW t Li s te i re W e bl Ca C m eg C t en te S ic pl e to Au a m u Ro tic te te ro Un e ut

Im

po

r

ea Cr

t ea Cr

e

at re

e

S

a re

u Ro

Re e bl

r po

t s es rn

ra Li b

ry Ra

us di rt H n ar

&

Ha

Ca

k ec Ch

nd Be

s es

ta Da

bo ai l N

d ar Co t en nt sh

er nt Ce d

po Ex

ar nd ta S

Co

p m

s nt ne o

fre Re

5 Locate the new harness assembly in the browser hierarchy.
assembly

harness assembly

NOTE Clicking the Create Harness tool again adds a second harness assembly
after the existing one at the same level.

Creating Harness Assemblies

|

199

6 Examine the standard toolbar to see the display settings for wires, cables, and segments. Click the arrow to display the list. The display for these harness objects can be changed at any time. The display for all objects of a selected type in a selected harness assembly can also be changed.

7 Click Help ➤ Help topics from the menu to access Help, and then scroll to the Autodesk Inventor Professional section. The Help system provides information about every feature in the Autodesk Inventor Professional modules as well as the standard Autodesk Inventor features. 8 Click the link to Cable and Harness to display and examine the Cable and Harness home page.

Cable and Harness Help

9 Close the Help window. 10 Activate the top level assembly and click File ➤ Save to save the file. The harness assembly is saved using the name and location indicated previously.

200

|

Chapter 9

Working with Harness Assemblies

Using the Cable and Harness Browser
All harness objects added to an assembly file are automatically contained in the harness assembly. The objects include wires, cables, cable wires, segments, splices, and optionally electrical parts and pins. Each harness assembly contains an Origin and a Representations folder and a single harness part. Although harness assemblies respond to representations in the parent assembly, they do not respond as expected to representations created at the harness assembly. For best results, create representations at the parent assembly level only. The harness part contains one folder for each of the harness objects (wires, cables, segments, and splices) that make up the harness. Each segment has a work point for every point used to shape the segment.

NOTE Promoting a harness part from its parent assembly corrupts the
Autodesk Inventor Professional cable and harness data. In this case, close the assembly without saving. Demoting the harness back to the subassembly does not fix the data.

Using the Cable and Harness Browser

|

201

The following image shows a browser with the possible harness objects displayed.
assembly

electrical part harness assembly harness part wires folder routed wire wire pin wire point wire cables folder cable wire cable wire point segments folder segment segment point splices folder splice splice pin

202

|

Chapter 9

Working with Harness Assemblies

Setting Properties for Harness Components
Every harness component contains a set of properties. These properties are used for the documentation you produce, such as reports and drawings. Properties are also used to check specific aspects of the design, such as bend radius and bundle diameters. Properties are added at different levels within the assembly. They can be added to the source component as well as to any occurrences of that component within the assembly. When you create a new harness object, some properties are required, such as the Pin Name for an electrical part occurrence, or the Wire ID for a wire. You can decide on what other properties to set. The properties you set are driven by the documentation you produce for downstream consumers. Some properties, such as length or adjusted length for a harness segment are derived from the placement or settings of the related component. These properties cannot be changed, but can be viewed and used in the documentation. You can set and view properties when the component is active in Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness. Some properties can also be accessed from other objects. For example, from the Wire Properties dialog box, you can view and modify properties on the parts and pins to which it is connected.

Customize Properties
The Custom tab of the Properties dialog box may contain predefined properties. These properties are available in the property Name list, and have a preset name and data type. You can add them to the object individually and set the value. If you need a property for a harness component that is not predefined by Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness, you can create a custom property. To create a custom property, you name the property and set its data type and value. Once the property is fully defined, it is added to the property Name list on the Custom tab. The property is also available in the Name list within the same part file or harness assembly for use on other harness objects. For more information about setting data types for custom properties, see the Autodesk Inventor Professional Help.

Setting Properties for Harness Components

|

203

Set Occurrence Properties
Harness objects have general properties that are stored in their source files, and unique occurrence properties that are stored within the assembly in which they are placed. Harness component occurrences get their properties from the source component. For example, when an electrical (pinned) part is placed in the harness assembly, its properties come from the part definition. When specific properties are needed for an occurrence, you can override a component-level property value with an occurrence property value. In the property list on the Custom tab, properties added to an occurrence are represented with white backgrounds. Properties listed with a dark background indicate a source-level property. For example, in the Wire Properties dialog box, for an occurrence wire, the properties added at the library level are displayed with a dark background.

Assign Occurrence Reference Designators
Now that the harness assembly is added, set a specific reference designator for each electrical part occurrence.

NOTE Add occurrence properties to electrical parts only after they are in their proper assembly location. Occurrence properties are lost when electrical parts are promoted or demoted, and must be reassigned.

204

|

Chapter 9

Working with Harness Assemblies

To set a reference designator for an electrical part occurrence 1 In the browser, double-click Harness Assembly1, if not already active. 2 Right-click the part name 360124, and then select Harness Properties from the context menu.

NOTE The browser has a gray background, but the parts can be selected.
3 In the Part Properties dialog box, set a RefDes of U3 for the occurrence, and then click OK. 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set a RefDes of U7 for part 360575:1. 5 Set a RefDes of U8 for part 360575:2. 6 In the browser, expand the PCB subassembly to locate part LTP, and then set a RefDes of J12. The generic placeholder RefDes for each part is overridden at the occurrence level with the unique value. The RefDes on each part occurrence is required.

Setting Properties for Harness Components

|

205

206 .

■ About the Cable and Harness Library ■ Locating the Cable and Harness library file ■ Using the cable and harness library dialog box ■ Adding library definitions ■ Modifying library definitions ■ Importing and exporting wire or cable library data 207 . you learn how to navigate in the library and use the Cable and Harness Library tool.Working with the Cable and Harness Library In This Chapter 10 All wires and cables in Autodesk Inventor® Professional Cable & Harness come from a single library. In this chapter.

View the basic properties for a selected wire or cable. Modify. You can also modify and remove existing definitions.About the Cable and Harness Library The cable and harness library contains the list of standard library wire and library cable definitions used to create wire and cable occurrences in a harness assembly. and delete existing wire and cable definitions. Explore the wires and cables in the list. NOTE If a cable and harness assembly that was created in Version 8 of Cable and Harness is opened in the current version.iwl and is located in the Design Data directory where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional. and exist only in the cable and harness library file. You can use any standard definition in the library or add your own definitions. the data format of the library must be migrated to the current version which includes cables. Import and export wire and cable libraries and definitions. You can change this location using the File Locations tab on the Harness Settings dialog box. You select wire and cable occurrences from this library list to insert them in the harness assembly. With the cable and harness library tools you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add new wire and cable definitions. refer to “migration. copy. View the total number of wires or cable wires in the library. By default. Locating the Cable and Harness Library File The cable and harness library file contains all the wire and cable data. If needed. import wires and cables using an import file. These wire and cable definitions do not have a physical representation. 208 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . the file is named Cable&HarnessDefaultLibrary<version>. Cable and Harness Library” in the Help index for more details about migration options. Outdated wire definitions must also be removed from the existing library. To add a large number of wire or cable definitions.

iwl file 1 In the browser. For wires the Default Library Wire is used when the cable and harness library cannot be found. the Cable and Harness library is read-only. right-click Harness Assembly1. If updates are required. 2 In the browser. If the Cable and Harness Library is accessed by multiple users. In this case. you access and view the name and location for the current cable and harness library file. one cable and harness library file is created and stored on a server for all harness assemblies to reference. There is no default library cable. if not already active. 4 If you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional to a location other than the default location. To view the location of the Cable&HarnessDefaultLibrary<version>. but you can still insert any library wire or cable listed in the Cable and Harness Library into the harness assembly. The first person to open the Cable and Harness Library can add. If the file location or name is changed. 3 In the Harness Settings dialog box. are notified that the library is being edited and it cannot be accessed. The Default Library Wire cannot be modified. You can set a different cable and harness library file and location for each harness assembly. In this exercise.iwl. and then select Harness Settings from the context menu. click the Browse button to navigate to and select the file in this new location. This harness assembly references the default cable and harness library file. the system determines if changes were made to the library data that require an update. If a new name is entered. the cable and harness library file is created in the specified directory. you must click the Update tool. although only one is recommended. NOTE To create a new. edit. click the File Locations tab. and remove wires. double-click Harness Assembly1. enter a new file name. The default file and location is C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Design Data\Cable&HarnessDefaultLibrary <version>. then click Apply or OK in the dialog box to load the library. the changes are immediately available in the active harness assembly.Typically. Each time the Cable and Harness Library is opened. About the Cable and Harness Library | 209 . it must be placed in a shared location. empty Cable and Harness Library. All others attempting to access the Cable and Harness Library.

Cable & Harness Library tool The following illustration shows the Cable & Harness Library dialog box with the Wires tab and Default Library Wire selected.Using the Cable and Harness Library Use the Cable & Harness Library tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar to display the Cable & Harness Library dialog box. You click the tab for the library data to view and use. The data and format displayed for each tab is very similar. 210 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . Wire and Cable tabs Library toolbar Categories and list of objects Default library wire Properties Wire total The features in the Cable & Harness Library dialog box include tabs for both wire and cable libraries. and then features specific to that library are displayed.

and delete individual library wire or library cable definitions. This wire cannot be deleted or modified. Using the Cable and Harness Library | 211 . copy. The total number of wires or cables in the library.The Cable & Harness Library also includes: Cable and Harness Library toolbar The tool set for the library that enables you to create. part number. (Wires only. and number of wires. outer diameter. Displayed wire properties include color style. Displayed cable properties include category. ry ry ra ra ib Li b tL rt or po xp m I E N ew it Ed Co py e le t De Categories and list of wires or cables Default Library Wire Number of Wires or Cables Wire or Cable Properties Lists the contents of the cable and harness library. and core size. outer diameter. part number. Displays properties for the selected definition and the category in which the selected object is organized.) The wire used by default when the wire library cannot be found. gauge. Import and export functions are also provided to bring wire and cable library data in and out of the library. The library contents include individual wires and cables and wires and cables in specified categories. edit. There is no default cable.

and the cable wires they contain. color. assign a part number. Library cable definitions consist of a cable ID. Sets new or edits existing custom properties. physical. If appropriate. The Library Cable Wire dialog box includes a Wires tab in addition to the General and Custom tabs listed previously: Wires Lists the wires that make up the cable so you can change the Conductor ID. an outer diameter. The Library Wire dialog box has two tabs: General Custom Sets required. Create New Library Definitions To create new library definitions for cables and wires. 212 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . you create a new library wire definition. For example.Adding Library Definitions Library wire definitions are two-dimensional cross sections with properties for gauge. you must specify the required properties. and outer diameter for a new library wire definition. and add additional physical properties. You can add cable and wire definitions to the library individually or load multiple wires or cables into the library at one time by importing from a spreadsheet or other list. organize new definitions into new or existing categories. diameter. and color. and optional properties for new definitions such as bend radius. In this exercise. All custom properties must have a data type. you must specify the wire name. Any number of custom properties may also be added.

General tab. New tool 3 In the Library Wire dialog box. A new Custom category containing the BLU_EE_22 wire is added to the list. 6 Click OK. specify: Name: BLU_EE_22 Category: Custom Color Style: Blue Part Number: 608201 4 In Physical. enter the following values related to the physical parameters of the wire: Outer Diameter: 0. and is saved for use in any harness assembly that references the library file. 7 Click Save on the Cable and Harness Library dialog box to save the wire to the referenced library.054 Gauge: 22 5 If necessary. Cable & Harness Library tool 2 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. Adding Library Definitions | 213 . select the New tool. click the Custom tab and provide the information to add additional properties to the wire definition. click the Cable and Harness Library tool on the Cable and Harness panel bar. in Properties.iam still open.To create a new library wire definition 1 With the Enclosure_Assembly. and the harness assembly active.

Edit Library Definitions You can edit any wire or cable definition in the library except the Default Library Wire. you can also add and remove wires from the cable. The name of the copied wire is BLU_EE_22 Copy by default. 2 Click the Copy tool. Edit tool 2 Change the settings as follows and click OK: Name: BLU_EE_22A Category: Generic The list of wires automatically expands to show the renamed wire in the Generic category. you can select wires and cables to copy. You can make up to 9 copies of the same wire before renaming it. you copy a wire that you created. you can right-click the wire in the list. To copy a library wire definition 1 With the Cable and Harness Library dialog box still open. select the wire BLU_EE_22 Copy in the list. go to the list of wires. To edit a wire definition in the library 1 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. 214 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . and then select the BLU_EE_22 wire that you just created. As an alternative. For cables. and the tools in the library. Copy tool A copy of the wire BLU_EE_22 is added to the wire list under the original wire. and then select Edit from the context menu. the listed categories. modify.Modifying Library Wire and Cable Definitions Using the list of wires or cables. or remove. For both wires and cables you can edit the general and custom properties. and then click the Edit tool. Copy Library Definitions In this exercise.

If a wire or cable that is deleted from the library has already been added to a harness assembly. You cannot delete wires used by a cable. NOTE If a wire or cable with the same name as the deleted one is added back into the Cable and Harness Library before a harness assembly is opened. and then click Yes to confirm the deletion. Add Properties to Library Definitions Use the Edit tool from the Cable and Harness Library dialog box to view. Modifying Library Wire and Cable Definitions | 215 . Although textured color styles are supported. you can right-click the wire. In this exercise. any occurrences of the wire automatically update with the new definition the next time the harness assembly is updated. In this exercise. any occurrences of that wire or cable in the assembly are not deleted. you add custom properties that further define a wire.Delete Library Definitions You can delete a library definition using the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. add. Alternatively. Use a color property to represent a textured wire. select the wire to delete: BLU_EE_22A. and then select Delete from the context menu. they cannot be viewed on wires displayed in the default centerline display mode. 2 Select the Delete tool. Delete tool 3 Look at the list to verify that the wire was deleted. you delete the wire definition you added previously. or modify library-level wire and cable properties. To delete a wire definition 1 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box.

and then add the wire color as a property. Importing and Exporting Wire Data Cable and Harness Library data can be imported into the library. click the property in the list. and then enter the following values: Name: Color Type: Text Value: Green/Yellow 5 Click Modify. which is a description of each wire or cable imported into or exported from a library. their associated data types. and corresponding units. you select a single color wire. and then enter two properties with the values shown. 2 Click the Edit tool. click the Custom tab. The configuration file describes the input parameters. expand the Generic category. See the Autodesk Inventor Professional Help for details on the format and contents of these files.In this exercise. 3 In the Library Wire dialog box. and then click OK. The data file contains the wire or cable data. as well as exported out of the library by specifying two files.cfg) are used for both processes. Click Add after entering each property: Name: VendorPartNumber Type: Text Value: 5876 Name: Volt Type: Voltage Value: 300V 4 To modify the existing color property. and then select the wire named 22AWG-GRN. To add custom properties to a wire 1 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box.csv) data file and a configuration file (. 216 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . 6 Save and close the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. A comma separated value (.

Category. Sample import configuration file for library wires: libwires C:\libwires.none For this exercise.none.Gauge text.text. New wires or cables are always added to the library. A blank value is entered by using two consecutive list separators.Outer Diameter.Outer Diameter.text.none. the system uses the following guidelines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Imported definitions always overwrite or update existing library definitions.log Cable Name.text.Category.none Sample import configuration file for library cables: libcables C:\libcables. The configuration and data files have already been created for you.Color Style. Import Into the Cable and Harness Library The workflow for importing wires or cables into the Cable and Harness Library is the same.Conductor ID. Importing and Exporting Wire Data | 217 .inch. Only one list separator is required if the entry is the last one in the row.length.Wire Name text.Part Number.text. Existing library property values can be changed. The data provided in the files is also different depending on the object you are importing. Properties on existing library wires or cables cannot be deleted via import.none.none.length. such as two consecutive commas. previously undefined properties are always added.text none.none.text.When you import a library wire or cable.log Wire Name.text. except you must do the import with the appropriate tab active.inch.none.text none. you import wires. but values for those properties can be deleted with a blank value.Part Number. New.

4 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box toolbar. including updates to wires. use the Browse buttons to navigate to the Cable & Harness ➤ Tutorial Files ➤ Wire Library directory where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional.cfg): WireLibrary. and errors associated with the import. 218 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . The log file contains details of the import. 7 Click Close on the confirmation dialog box. 3 Ensure that the Wires tab is selected.cfg Data File (. The Cable and Harness Library dialog box is updated with the GXL data after the import. 2 Select the Cable and Harness Library tool from the Cable & Harness panel bar. Versions of the files that use the semi-colon delimiter are also provided. For this example use the listed files.To import wires into the library 1 Ensure Harness Assembly1 is still active. Typically you use the file version with the delimiter specified in the windows regional or language settings for your locale. which is commonly used in the United States to separate values. and then open the following files: Configuration File (. Import Library Wires tool The Cable and Harness Library dialog box remains open during the import. 5 From the Import Library Wires dialog box. select the Import Library Wires tool.csv): LibraryGXLWires. 8 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box.csv NOTE The files listed above use the comma delimiter. 6 Click OK to add the wire data to the open library. A dialog box appears indicating the status of the import and confirms the name and location of the log file. Other locales may use a semi-colon. click Save to finish.

Export Library Data When exporting data from a library. and respects the locale-specific list separator for the column delimiter. ensure that the Wires tab is selected. and then the system writes the data to the comma separated data file as specified. or select an existing file. The same data file (.cfg). To export wire data from the library 1 Ensure the harness assembly is active and the Cable and Harness Library dialog box still displayed. existing data is overwritten.cfg.csv) used for export (along with the corresponding configuration file) can be used for import. and then select the Export Library Wires tool. 2 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box toolbar. select the needed Configuration File (. 5 Click OK in the Export Library Wires dialog box.csv) that is output. All property values are exported using the unit preference settings. which constitutes a complete round trip from and to the library. The configuration file specifies which properties to export. 4 Enter the name and location for the Data File (. 7 Click Save and Close on the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. WireLibrary. Export Library Wires tool 3 In the Export Library Wires dialog box. you set the name and location for the output file. Importing and Exporting Wire Data | 219 . If you use an existing file. The data file includes information for each wire or cable contained in the library. 6 Click Close on the Confirmation dialog box.

The import file must reference existing wire definitions. clear the check box and enter a diameter value. NOTE The wires referred to by a cable definition must already exist in the library before they can be added to the cable. 11 Click Save to save the definition to the Cable & Harness Library. You must add at least one wire. 2 Select the New tool. 6 Click the Wires tab. 10 Click OK to create the cable definition and close the dialog box. click the General tab. and then click Close to close the dialog box. and then enter a unique cable Name. and then click Add. such as vendor and jacket color. provide a Part Number and Category. 220 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . and then click OK. select the Calculate from Wires check box. and then click Add to add wires to the cable definition. 4 Optionally. 8 Continue adding wires until all wires the make up the cable are added. select a wire from the list of library wires.Practicing Your Skills For additional practice you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create additional wires Copy a cable definition Delete a cable definition Add properties to a cable definition Use the skills you just learned along with the following steps to create a new library cable definition. This includes the library cable import. To create a new library cable definition 1 Click the Cables tab in the Cable & Harness Library dialog box. click the Custom tab and add additional properties to the library cable definition. 9 If appropriate. 7 In the Add Wires dialog box. For a variable diameter. 3 In the Library Cable dialog box. 5 Select the needed Outer Diameter setting: ■ ■ For a fixed diameter.

Working with Wires and Cables In This Chapter 11 In this chapter. ■ About wires and cables ■ Inserting wires and cables manually ■ Moving wires and cables ■ Deleting wires and cables ■ Replacing wires and cables ■ Inserting wires and cables using a wire list ■ Adding shape to wires and cable wires ■ Occurrence properties ■ Changing wire and cable display 221 . you learn how to add wires and cables to an assembly and modify them.

222 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . and you can replace wires. accept the default Wire ID.About Wires and Cables Wires and cables are retrieved from the Cable and Harness Library and placed in the assembly using manual or automatic methods. and then identify the two pins on the electrical parts or splices. Inserting Wires and Cables Manually To insert individual wires or cables into an assembly. you select the cable to insert. The system automatically calculates lengths based on placement in the assembly. To manually insert cables. To insert a wire manually 1 In the browser. and then select the pins for each end of the wire. and then identify the pins for each wire in the cable. select the Create Wire tool. 3 In the Create Wire dialog box. you import a wire list. You can also edit. you select the wire to insert. 2 On the Cable & Harness panel bar. delete. Create Wire tool Create Cable tool Insert Wires Manually To insert wires. To automatically insert multiple wires or cables. and move wires and cables. To manually insert wires. double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active. The Wire ID is Wire plus an incremental number starting with 1. use the Create Wire or Create Cable tool. select the wire to connect. you provide a wire ID. which is Wire1. Once the wires and cables are in the assembly you can add points to control shape.

9 To create the wire.4 From the list of wires. move the cursor over the pins in part 360124. select the wire to insert. the application gives you visual feedback. The Pin 1 button changes from red to white. As you select points for a wire. The pin changes color when selected. 7 Pause the cursor over the first pin on part LTP. The messages change. Inserting Wires and Cables Manually | 223 . When the tooltip is displayed as U3 Pin 1. based on what is selected and the action you perform. 6 In the graphics window. click the button. click the point to select the second pin. and the Pin 2 button is activated (depressed). Use the arrows to select from the list: Category: Generic Name: 22AWG-GRN 5 Verify that the Pin 1 button is depressed. The following image shows the message and the preview wire. click the work point representing the start pin for the wire. If it is not. click Apply in the dialog box. 8 When the tooltip is displayed as J12 Pin 1. A preview wire is created and text messages in the status bar instruct you on the next step. Select the category and wire name shown.

click the Properties button to view the properties for the library wire. Wire 2 12 Click Cancel to close the dialog box. right-click. depending on the display setting. right-click.The wire is created as centerline or rendered. and then select Finish Edit. 224 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . 15 In the browser or graphics window. right-click. 11 Add one more wire connecting U3 Pin 2 to J12 Pin 2. The occurrence inherits the properties from the library wire. Wire1 10 While the dialog box is still open. and then select Finish Edit. and then select Apply from the context menu. 14 Expand the harness part and the Wires folder to view the added wires in the hierarchy. Display is set to centerline for wires and cables by default. The wire that is placed is an occurrence wire. Click OK. 13 In the browser.

If it is not. and then click OK: New Harness Assembly Name: Harness Assembly2. and then you add the cable wires. or browse to Program Files\ Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files 3 Add the following reference designators for the connectors: For part 360575:1 add RefDes U7 For part 360575:2 add RefDes U8 4 On the Cable & Harness panel bar. Use the arrows to select from the list: Category: Belden Name: 8441 This cable contains two wires to connect in the assembly. 2 Select the Create Harness tool. 5 In the Create Cable dialog box. Select the category and cable name shown. you provide a cable ID.Insert Cables Manually To insert cables. select the cable to insert. By default. in the cable. 6 From the list of cables. If needed. 8 By default. To insert a cable manually 1 Ensure nothing is selected in the browser. you can also manually select the order in which to connect the cable wires. When the tooltip is displayed as U8 Pin 1. accept the default Cable ID. select the first cable wire in the list. move the cursor over the pins in part 36575:2. In this exercise. 7 Verify that the Pin 1 button is depressed. By default. click the button. you add a second harness assembly so that the cable harness can be documented in a separate nailboard drawing. and then select the pins for each wire. starting with the first cable wire. the Cable ID is Cable plus an incremental number starting with 1. the first cable wire is automatically selected for connection. Cable wires are automatically assigned Wire IDs as they are connected. If it is not. 9 In the graphics window. click the work point. or conductor. rotating as needed to see the part. select the Create Cable tool. Inserting Wires and Cables Manually | 225 .iam New Harness Location: Enter the path. select the cable to connect. which is Cable1. The system automatically advances through the cable wires in sequence. enter the name for the harness assembly and the location as shown. the Wire ID is the Cable ID plus the Conductor ID.

Connected cable wire Spare (disconnected) cable wire 11 Connect the second cable wire from Pin 2 on part 36575:2 (tooltip U8 Pin 2) to Pin 2 on part 36575:1 (tooltip U7 Pin 2). click the Properties button to view the properties for the cable. Cable Wires 14 In the browser. 226 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . expand the harness assembly and the Cables folder to view the added cable and cable wires in the hierarchy. 13 Click OK to create the cable wire and close the dialog box. 12 If desired.10 Connect the other end of the cable wire to part 36575:1. click the work point. and then the system automatically advances to the next cable wire. The status of the cable wire in the list changes to connected. When the tooltip is displayed as U7 Pin 1.

Both routed and unrouted wires and cables can be changed. 2 In the browser or graphics window. and the conductor ID in parentheses. you may need to set the Select tool to Select sketch features. including splice pins. cable wires are named with the Cable ID followed by the conductor ID. Moving Wires and Cables From within a harness assembly. and then select Edit Wire from the context menu. cable wires that have no connections. 3 In the Edit Wire dialog box. To move a wire 1 Activate Harness Assembly1. Moving Wires To move a wire. The preview wire is a straight white line drawn between the two pins. you move Pin 2 of the wire you added previously to another pin on the same connector.In the browser. NOTE To select the pin in the graphics window. A dangling wire can also be moved to reattach detached ends to existing pins. choose the wire to move. verify the Pin 1 button is selected. 4 In the graphics window. select Edit Wire from the context menu. You cannot remove the conductor ID in parentheses. move the cursor over the pins to preview the wire connection possibilities before making a selection. and then select the new pin connection. Spare cable wires. Cable wire names are changed by modifying the Wire ID in the Cable Wire Properties dialog box. right-click Wire1. can also be attached to pins. click the selection button representing the pin connection to change. In this exercise. a wire or cable can have one or both of its ends moved and reterminated to different pins. Moving Wires and Cables | 227 .

right-click. The workflow for moving a cable is as follows: 1 Select the cable containing the cable wires to move. 6 Continue selecting cable wires and changing pin connections as needed until the desired cable wires are moved. 7 Click Cancel to close the dialog box. To move a cable. click the pin as shown in the following illustration.5 When the tooltip is displayed as U3 Pin 6. The wire is redrawn using the new pin. 5 Select the new pin connection. however. click the wire to move. and then select Apply from the context menu. 228 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . 4 Click the selection button representing the pin connection to change. 2 Select Edit Cable from the context menu 3 In the Edit Cable dialog box. new position 7 Click Cancel to close the dialog box. you move the wires it contains. original location preview of new location 6 To create the wire in the new location. and the wire length is updated as needed. Moving Cables Moving cables and wires is very similar.

select Wire2. you may need to set the Select tool to Select Sketch Features. To delete a wire 1 Activate Harness Assembly1. 2 In the browser or graphics window. if not already active. and then select Delete from the context menu. NOTE To select the wire in the graphics window. Deleting Wires and Cables | 229 .Deleting Wires and Cables Wires and cables you no longer need in your design can be deleted at any time. 3 Right-click. and then delete it using the context menu. Deleting Wires To remove a wire. select the wire to remove. The wire is deleted.

or to leave it as a spare. and then expand the harness part to see the Cables folder.Removing Cables and Cable Wires There are several ways you can remove cables from your design. To disconnect a cable wire 1 In the browser. and then click OK. activate Harness Assembly2. Notice how the cable wire termination status updates. Removing a cable wire from a cable definition does not remove the cable from the library. To delete a cable. 230 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . 4 In the Edit Cable dialog box. however it does remove the wire from any occurrences of that cable in the harness. all properties on the cable wire are reset to the library-level property values. Disconnect a selected cable wire from its current connection. and then select Edit Cable. 2 Expand the Cables folder. and the cable wire is removed from the graphics window. cables that are no longer used can be deleted at any time. You can: ■ ■ ■ Delete an entire cable. and then select Cable1:1(1). select the cable wire to disconnect. 6 Reconnect the wire to Pin 1 on both connectors as you did earlier. you must edit the cable definition in the Cable and Harness Library and then delete the cable wire. Disconnected wires are also removed from the graphics window. and then click Apply. Wires that make up a cable can also be disconnected. Each time a cable wire is disconnected. You can disconnect a wire to reterminate it to different pins. To remove a cable wire from a cable. 3 Right-click. use the same workflow used for deleting wires. Like wires. Delete a selected cable wire from the cable definition. 5 Click Disconnect.

Replacing Wires To change or replace a wire definition. click the Update tool. right-click. and then Cancel. In the Edit Wire dialog box. remain the same and the library-level wire properties are added to the occurrence wire immediately. 6 Return the wire to the original. 2 In the browser or graphics window. you select the wire to change. including the Wire ID. They must be deleted and re-added with the desired cable chosen from the library list. NOTE To select the wire in the graphics window. and then select Edit Wire. select: Category: Generic Name: 22AWG-GRN 7 Click OK to close the dialog box. and then select the new library wire definition. click Apply. click Properties to view the properties for the library wire. you may need to set the Select tool to Select sketch elements. The wire occurrence property values. Replacing Wires | 231 . NOTE Cables cannot be replaced. The wire in the graphics window is redrawn in violet. green wire definition. Wire color changes take effect immediately. select Wire1. 3 From the Edit Wire dialog box select: Category: Belden Name: 9916-VIO 4 If necessary. 5 To redraw the wire using the new definition. To replace a wire 1 Activate Harness Assembly1. To see the effect of changes to outer diameter values. The wire is redrawn using the new definition.

If no path is listed. the log file is created in the same directory as the . REFDES1.log. which respects the locale-specific list separator. the object is “cablesandwires”. The data file specifies the point-to-point connectivity of each wire and cable wire. Previous file formats that contain only wires will still work for wire import.csv data file.cfg) file and a comma separated (. If a new wire or cable has the same ID as an existing one. For example. Cable ID. The output log file path and name. The import checks for duplicates. and Pin2. data type. Import Wire List tool To import the wires and cables. it is not added. The import process can be done many times with the same or different import files. Conductor ID. describes the format of the input . For cable and wire occurrences. LOGFILE HEADER1 (Property Name) 232 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables .csv file. A warning is issued if the duplicate entry has different data or connectivity. Cable occurrences must use the format listed: OBJECT Type of object contained in the input file. C:\WireListImport\wirelist. REFDES2. Pin1.csv) data file. select the two import files to use. Configuration File Formats The configuration file must contain the following information to accommodate both wires and cables. as long as the minimum required subset is present.Importing Wire Lists Use Import Wire List on the Cable & Harness panel bar to automatically add (connect) multiple wires or cables in the harness assembly. Specifies the order. The REFDES can be from splices or connectors. The custom properties and required properties can be in any order. The import files include a configuration (. There must be a Wire ID. Library Name. and units of the input parameters. missing and changed wires or cable wires. It is not case sensitive. The Cable and Conductor ID’s are required only when importing cable wires. The configuration file.

Leave this column blank for wires. (Cables only. Each configuration file performs a different task. For each cable and wire included in the file. Importing Wire Lists | 233 . The wire connectivity parameters in the comma separated data file must have the exact data types and units specified in the configuration file. A unique pin name on the second pin. The separator recognized in a . and for producing reports.) A unique identifier for each cable. NOTE Configuration files are used for importing wire connectivity data and cable and harness library data. A wire or cable name in the library.csv file is not always a comma. Units must be appropriate for the data type specified for the given property name. A unique identifier on the second connector or splice occurrence. Leave this column blank for wires.) A unique identifier for each cable wire. Refer to the Autodesk Inventor® Professional Cable & Harness Help for more details on data types and unit handling. For example. A unique identifier for the first connector or splice occurrence. Specifies the unit of measure associated with the data type in the same column. the following information is required: Wire ID Cable ID Library Name Conductor ID REFDES1 PIN1 REFDES2 PIN2 A unique identifier for each wire. Comma Separated Value Data File Formats Any number of wires or cables can be included in the comma separated data (. It is determined by regional settings in Microsoft® Windows®.csv) file. (Cables only. in another country the separator could be a semicolon.HEADER2 (Data Type) HEADER3 (Unit) Specifies the data type associated with the property name in the same column. and requires information specific to that task. A unique pin name on the first pin.

Any RefDes values set in the part file are not used. They are located in the Cable & Harness ➤ Tutorial Files ➤ Wire List Import folder where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional. cable ID and Conductor ID. NOTE The electrical part RefDes value is only recognized by the Import Wire list function when it is set at the occurrence level. A message box is displayed with the status of the import. The message indicates that seven wires imported successfully. select the Import Wire List tool. Import Wire List tool 3 Click Browse to locate and open the import files listed below. To view the file contents.csv): WireListImport. you import seven discrete wires into the harness assembly using import files that were already created for you. You can check the log file for details on the import. Configuration File (. The cable columns. To import a wire list to a harness assembly 1 In the browser.Additional wire or cable occurrence properties can be imported on an objectby-object basis after the required input parameters. double-click Harness Assembly1 as the assembly to receive the imported wires. In this exercise.cfg): WireListConfiguration. are left blank. click OK.cfg Data File (.csv 4 To add the wires to the active harness assembly. The corresponding data type and unit for each custom property added must be listed in the associated configuration file. including any associated errors or warnings. open the file in a text editor. 234 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . 2 In the Cable & Harness panel bar.

REFDES 2.Library Name. The following is an example of a wire list that contains both wires and cables. End of exercise..11.CA2.4.J6. 1007.J5. 1008. 1010.3.J3.8.Belden 4C 22AWG1..5 Click Close on message dialog box. The wires are added to the harness assembly.Cable ID.Belden 4C 22AWG.J2.CA1.CA1. 1003... and then the Import Wire List dialog box.J5.7.Pin 1.CA1.6.CA2.18 AWG BLU.. 1011.1.9.Belden 4C 22AWG2.J5..18 AWG BLK.2.2.3.CA1.J2.4..12.3.CA2.4.J2.3.Belden 4C 22AWG3. 1006.3.1.6.J6.Belden 4C 22AWG.J1.18 AWG RED.1.J8.Belden 4C 22AWG4.J1.4. 1005.2.J8..J3.Conductor ID. 1002.REFDES 1.J2.J6..Belden 4C 22AWG.J1.J5.Belden 4C 22AWG.J3. 1009. 1004.Pin 2 1001..J8.5.2. There are 3 discrete wires and 2 cables: //Wire ID.CA2.2.3.J1.J8. Importing Wire Lists | 235 .

If this point-to-point state is not appropriate. you can control the shape by adding and adjusting wire work points on: ■ ■ Unrouted wires and cable wires Wire stubs and cable wire stubs You cannot add work points to cables or spare cable wires.Adding Shape to Wires and Cable Wires A wire or cable wire is initially placed as a point-to-point connection between the pins to which it is attached. Add Wire Points 1 Rotate the view until it looks like the following image. 236 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . In the following exercises you add points on a wire. adjust the points to change the shape of the wire. Once work points are added. NOTE Because all wire and cable wire work points are deleted when routed from a point-to-point state. 2 Double-click Harness Assembly1. and then delete them. you can adjust their location and offset value to achieve the shape you need. Autodesk recommends that you add work points only after routing the wire or cable wire for the first time.

and then select Add Points on the context menu. Wire points based on an arbitrary point on a face are offset a specified distance and will not update to changes in the model. changing shape slightly after each point is added. 4 Move the cursor over the wire in the graphics window. Redefine and Move Wire Points Once the points are added you can redefine the points to an arbitrary location or feature to achieve the shape you need. 5 Right-click and select Finish. Adding Shape to Wires and Cable Wires | 237 .3 In the browser. including changes from positional representations. wire point 1 wire point 2 wire point 3 A grounded work point is created at each pick location. points based on existing geometry are not offset and update to changes in the model. See page 165 for a list of valid geometry selections. right-click wire 2207. and the wire recomputes. and then click the wire to create the three points in the order shown. Like the points used to define pins on parts.

right-click again (not on the point). right-click work point 21. right-click work point 20 (the middle point). 2 In the graphics window. 7 Select or drag a triad segment to move the point to the location shown.200 to change the offset. 238 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . and then select 3D Move/Rotate. Notice the tooltip that shows the offset value for the point. NOTE To create a point that would update to changes in the model. 4 Click the point and the wire recomputes. 1 In the browser.You can also reposition wire work points dynamically or by precise coordinates with the 3D Move/Rotate tool. 6 In the browser or graphics window. expand wire 2207. 3 In the graphics window. pause the cursor near the middle of the circle shown to create a point that is offset from the face of the enclosure. and then enter . select Edit Offset from the context menu. rotate the view to see the increased offset. 5 If appropriate. click the circular edge. and then select Redefine Point from the context menu.

2 To remove all points from the wire. and then select Delete All Points on the context menu.The position of the wire is previewed and any bend radius violations noted before applying the move. Adding Shape to Wires and Cable Wires | 239 . and then select Delete Point on the context menu. The wire returns to its point-to-point state and the length of the wire is recomputed. right-click Wire 2207. The wire recomputes. preview wire 8 Click OK and the wire recomputes to the new location. Delete Wire Work Points You can delete individual wire work points or all points at once. 1 Right-click work point 19 in the browser.

These properties are available in the property Name list and have a preset name and type. Occurrence Displays the Wire ID property that can be edited on the occurrence. From/To Custom The Custom tab of the properties dialog box for wire occurrences contains several predefined. It also includes length information. General Displays the library-level properties for the selected wire occurrence. You can add them to the occurrences individually and set the value. The recommended properties for wire occurrences are: Separation Code Class Max Length Categorizes wires into types or categories for comparison. You can override the library-level property value with an occurrence property value.Setting Occurrence Properties Wire and cable occurrences inherit the general properties that were created at the library level. bend radius. Occurrence properties can be stored within the assembly in which the wires and cables are placed. These properties cannot be edited at the occurrence level. The maximum allowable length for wire. Categorizes wires and segments into class groupings for comparison. Lists the RefDes and pin name for each end of the wire and provides links to the properties for those pins and connectors. properties. and display options. Wire Occurrence Properties The Wire Properties dialog box for wire occurrences has four tabs. NOTE It is recommended that you define the bend radius at the library level so that it appears on all occurrences. or recommended. Lists and sets the custom properties for the selected wire. 240 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables .

These properties cannot be edited at the occurrence level. you change the value of the custom Volt property for a wire. 7 Click Modify to override the property in the table. 2 In the browser or graphics window. 4 Click the Custom tab. or recommended. and then click Apply. General Wires Custom The Custom tab of the properties dialog box for wire occurrences contains several predefined.Cable Occurrence Properties The Cable Properties dialog box for cable occurrences also has four tabs. The recommended properties for cable occurrences are the same properties listed for wires. To override a library-level property 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active. Displays the library-level properties for the selected cable occurrence. You can add them to the occurrences individually and set the value. bend radius information. properties. Notice that the custom properties added at the library level are displayed with a dark background. Lists and sets the custom properties for the selected cable. Setting Occurrence Properties | 241 . and display options. 6 Select the property Value of 300 volts and change it to 200 volts. 3 Right-click Wire1 and select Harness Properties from the context menu. Occurrence Displays the Cable ID property that can be edited on the occurrence. Override Library-level Properties In this exercise. These properties are available in the property Name list and have a preset name and type. 5 Click the Volt property in the table. It also includes length. Lists the wires in the cable and enables you to connect and disconnect cable wires from the cable. expand the Harness Assembly1 part and the Wires folder.

and value appear in the bottom left of the dialog box. Changing Wire and Cable Displays Wires and cables can be displayed as either rendered or centerline. right-click. rendered display centerline display 242 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . To restore a library-level property value 1 With the Library Dialog box still open. the harness object is drawn as a threedimensional shaded solid with the diameter as set in the library definition. Centerline display is the default and should be used for optimal performance while creating and routing wires and cables. In this exercise. 3 Click OK to save the change and close the dialog box. Notice that the library-level property name. which is similar to how the physical object appears. you restore the library-level property value for the custom Volt property with the value override. With centerline display the objects are drawn as lines. and then select Restore.Restore Library-Level Properties To restore a property value to its original library-level value. The wire library replaces the occurrence value with the library value. and then select Restore from the context menu. If Rendered Display is selected. position the cursor anywhere in the selected table row. click the Volt row in the custom property table to select it. 2 Right-click anywhere in the row. making it easier to see and work on existing model geometry.

select any wire from the list of wires. select Centerline Display to return the wires to the default centerline display mode. 2 From the browser or graphics window. right-click. All wires in the selected harness assembly are displayed as rendered. 5 On the Standard toolbar. select the Wires folder in the browser.The display options can be set for individual wires or cables or for all wires or cables in a selected harness assembly. 3 Right-click. and then select Display as Rendered from the context menu. NOTE To select the wire in the graphics window. and then select Display All as Rendered from the context menu. Display Settings options. Changing Wire and Cable Displays | 243 . 4 To change the display for all wires. you may need to set the Select tool to Select Sketch Features. To change the display for wires 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active.

244 .

and how to change the segment display characteristics. In this chapter.Working with Segments In This Chapter 12 Segments define virtual paths used for routing wires and cables through assemblies. ■ About harness segments ■ Segment basics ■ Work point selections ■ Creating segments ■ Manipulating segments ■ Changing segment displays ■ Setting segment defaults 245 . you learn how to define and manipulate a segment. how to branch a segment.

Once a path is defined. The segment is created with a default diameter. you can add additional segment work points where it is critical for the segment to adapt to changes in the assembly. or direct the segment around geometry to avoid. Work points are used to manipulate the segment into its desired position and shape. or to control the direction of the segment around or through existing assembly geometry. Create Segment tool To create a segment you define at least two points. are especially useful for directing segments through tie-downs. Feedback is provided throughout the creation process to highlight valid points and show the offset for your selections. define work features at critical locations prior to inserting the segment. As you design. and is offset a specified distance from selected geometry. since additional work points slow performance and make relocating work points more difficult. a start point and an endpoint. Each click in the graphic window creates a work point on the segment. 246 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . Work features. Work features can also help create a more accurate approach to the connectors. For more precise placement of segment work points. including inserting splices or creating segment branches. it can be modified in several ways. Segment work points associated to work features update when the model changes. Use as few work points as possible.About Segments Segments define the possible paths a wire or cable can take through an assembly. They also react to positional representations. clips. or other geometry. Define Segments Use the Create Segment tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar to create a path for routing wires and cables. such as work points and work axes.

the points you select for segments determine whether certain work points are updated when changes are made to the associated geometry. Apply Offset Distances Arbitrary points selected on a face are offset a set distance from the selected geometry. right-click in the graphics window. NOTE The offset distance is applied only while you create segments. the placement of the start and endpoints of the segment in relation to the wire or cable connection points is an important consideration.Selecting Work Points for Segments Like the points used to define pins and wire points. Segment points based on existing geometry are not offset. the system checks for the harness segment ends closest to each end of the wire or cable. Plan Segment Start Points and Endpoints When multiple segments exist in an assembly. When automatically routing wires and cables. do update when changes are made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Existing work points Center points on any circular component such as a face. Segment work points created by selecting arbitrary points on a face are not updated to changes in the model geometry. a hole. Whenever possible. and cylindrical cuts or arc edges Existing sketch points Model vertices Select Undo or press ESC while creating a segment to remove the last segment point created and end the create segment operation. Selecting Work Points for Segments | 247 . It is not applied when wires or cables are routed through the segment and cause the update of the diameter. To adjust the segment offset as you move through the assembly. Segment work points based on the following geometry. place the harness segments so there is no confusion as to which segment is closest to the connection points. and select Edit Offset. See “Defining Automatic Routes” on page 268 for details about how the system automatically routes wires and cables. and then searches for the shortest path through the identified contiguous segments. A segment can require several different offset distances throughout its length.

You adjust the offset while you work. 2 In the Cable & Harness panel bar. orient and zoom the view as shown in the following illustration. A work point is defined to control the approach to the first connector. you define a harness segment between two circular connectors and around the PCB board in the enclosure. and then select point 1. and then adjust them later.Creating Segments You can define segment paths as close to the desired results as possible. In the following exercises. or you can develop them using work features you set when planning the segment path. click the Create Segment tool. 3 In the graphics window. 248 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . To start a segment 1 In the browser. point 1 A segment work point is created at the selected point. You define a second harness segment between two circular connectors and around the PCB board on the opposite side of the first segment. double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already selected.

6 For the second point orient and zoom the view as shown.270. and then enter 0. offset guide 5 Before you select the next point. NOTE Units are not required when entering offset values. a straight line appears from the selected point to the current cursor position. and the symbol shows the actual offset distance as a guide for your selections. As you make your selections. right-click. point 2 Creating Segments | 249 . The tooltip displays the offset value. increase the offset to prepare for a branch that is created in a later exercise.4 Move the cursor over the bottom of the enclosure until the tooltip and offset symbol appear. If no unit is specified the default unit setting is used. The system draws the line between the points as selections are made. select Edit Offset from the context menu. and then select a point based on the bottom of the enclosure. To increase the offset.

7 Continue selecting points around the printed circuit board (PCB) and toward the other connector to create the segment shape similar to the following image. select Edit Offset. The following image shows several additional point selections. 250 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . pause the cursor over the connector face near the center hole. 9 Right-click. 8 For the last point. 10 Click to select the point as shown in the illustration. Exact placement of the work points is not important. and then enter . You can adjust the work points once the segment is complete.200.

3 Offset the first point 0. The system generates the segment. Creating Segments | 251 . and then select Finish to complete the segment. click the Create Segment tool and create a segment from connector 360575:2 to connector 360575:1. 2 In the Cable & Harness panel bar. as shown in the following illustration.200 from the face of the first connector as you did in the previous exercise.11 Right-click. 4 Continue selecting points as shown to create a segment similar to the one in the illustration that follows. make sure Harness Assembly2 is active. adjust the work points in areas of highest curvature to reduce the curve. Refer to the “Redefine or Move Segment Work Points” on page 254 for details about adjusting segment work points. NOTE If an error message is displayed and the sweep cannot be generated. To start another segment 1 In the browser.

The new segment should be below the first segment as shown. 6 Click the bottom of the connector face near pins 7 and 8.5 Change the offset to .270. and other geometry was turned off for illustration purposes. pcb.) segment 1 segment 2 252 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . (The visibility of the enclosure. segment 2 7 Right-click and select Finish to complete the segment.

2 From the Cable & Harness panel bar.Add Segment Branches Segment branches are made by starting or ending a new segment on an existing segment. there are three segments sharing a common end point. and then select one point (2) between the segment and the connector. Once completed. To add a segment branch 1 In the browser.470. 3 Pause the cursor over the harness segment to branch. No tangent constraint is formed between the branch and the two original segments. and then click the segment work point shown as the branch start point. point 2 Creating Segments | 253 . double-click Harness Assembly1. each of the three segments behave as separate entities and can assume different diameters. branch point 4 Change the offset to 0. As wires and cables are routed. click the Create Segment tool. The original segment is broken into two separate segments.

The work point remains grounded. The work point becomes associative to new geometry that you select. right-click the work point in the browser or graphics window. and then select the new location. 6 Right-click. To modify grounded and ungrounded work points. and then select the face of the connector near pin 3.270. Delete work points. Grounded work points can also be modified using the 3D Move/Rotate option. and then drag the work point to the desired location. Changes to the geometry reposition the associated work point. Move and redefine work points. it can be modified in several ways. 254 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . select the Redefine Point option. Manipulating Segments Once a segment path is defined. change the offset to . select the 3D Move/Rotate option. You can: ■ ■ ■ Add additional work points. Redefine or Move Segment Work Points You move and redefine segment work points just as you would move and redefine other work points.5 For the final point (3). To use 3D Move/Rotate. and then select Finish to complete the branch with a shape similar to that in the image.

To move the work point 1 To get a better view of your data. 4 Right-click and select 3D/Move Rotate from the context menu. right-click. moved point Manipulating Segments | 255 . right-click the second branch work point labeled as moved point in the following illustration. delete the existing segment and create a new one. rather than try to adjust existing segment work points to accommodate the changes. turn the visibility off for any geometry obstructing your view. NOTE When the location of a segment changes dramatically. Creating a view that shows only the harnesses or a specific harness assembly can also be useful. 5 Drag the point vertically until the preview looks similar to the following shape. and then select Apply. You can create design views that include only the components necessary to wire the assembly. and search for “work points” in the index.For more information about working with work points. you use 3D Move/Rotate to adjust a work point for the segment branch. see Help in Autodesk Inventor®. 2 Double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active. In this exercise. 3 In the graphics window.

and then click Bend Radius ➤ Check from the context menu to verify whether any points along the segment violate the bend radius value. 5 Right-click and select Finish to exit the add point operation. check” in the Help index for more details on bend radius checking. 3 Pause the cursor over the area of the segment shown in the illustration. Select “bend radius. Make sure the bend radius multiplier is set before checking the points. The point is added and the segment recomputes. 2 In the browser or graphics window. NOTE Once a segment is created. Insert Segment Work Points If the design changes so that you need more control over the segment shape in certain areas. if it is not already active. right-click.6 Continue adjusting until you are satisfied with the shape. you can insert additional points. highlighted segment path 4 Click the path to add the point. and then select OK. you can select it in the browser. and then select Add Points from the context menu. 256 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . The path and work points highlight as you move the cursor over the segment. To add a segment work point 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 to activate it in place. right-click Segment2.

Delete Harness Segments Before you delete an entire segment. To keep the points. 2 Select Delete Point. To delete a work point from a single segment 1 With the harness assembly still active. no merging occurs. If the point is a common end point of two segments. right-click the point to remove. and then select Delete Point from the context menu. right-click the point you just added. segment with branch segment with deleted branch When a segment is deleted. thus keeping the shape of the segment after the segment is gone. any wires or cables routed through that segment unroute from that segment only. If the segment deleted is a branch. The point is removed and the segment recomputes. the object returns to an unrouted state. If the point is the common end point of three or more segments (branches). you can choose whether you want the points from the deleted segment to remain on the wires that were routed through it. each segment has a unique work point at its end. activate the harness assembly.Delete Harness Segment Work Points To delete a work point from a harness segment. To delete a segment. Instead. The point is removed and the segment recomputes. If the wire or cable was routed through more than one segment. right-click. select the segment from the browser or graphics window. If the wire or cable was routed through the deleted segment only. then it remains routed through the other segments. the two remaining segments are not merged. they merge into a single segment. and then select Delete from the context menu. and can be manipulated independently. click the Wires/Cables tab on the Harness Settings dialog box and click Inherit Segment Points on Segment Delete. Any splice attached to a deleted segment point is also deleted. Manipulating Segments | 257 .

segments contain a set of properties that provide a complete definition of the segment in the assembly. 3 Click the various tabs to view and set the desired properties. Double-click any row to display the properties dialog box for that wire or cable wire occurrence. 258 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . right-click a segment. segments do not exist in the context of a library and do not contain librarylevel properties. and then select Harness Properties from the context menu. They contain only occurrence-level properties. Lists properties for wires and cables routed through the segment. or reserved. To access segment properties 1 Double-click the harness assembly. Custom On the custom tab there are several preset. properties available from the Name list. Refer to the Help in Autodesk Inventor® Professional for details about these properties. The Segment Properties dialog box has three tabs. 2 In the browser or graphics window.Setting Segment Properties Like wires and cables. including segment display and bend radius. Occurrence Wires/Cables Lists properties related to the physical aspects of the segment. Unlike wires and cables. Lists custom properties added to the segment.

or deleted. ■ ■ For a variable diameter. By default. 4 Click OK. select the Calculate Size from Wires check box. The segments are updated accordingly. segment diameters are updated automatically as wires and cables are routed. 3 In the Segment Properties dialog box. Setting Diameter Behavior in Segments | 259 . The diameter of variable segments are automatically updated as wires and cables are added or removed. such as semi-rigid tubing. and then select Harness Properties from the context menu. select the appropriate diameter setting. To change the segment diameter behavior 1 Double-click the harness assembly containing the segments to change.Setting Diameter Behavior in Segments Segments can be configured as fixed diameter segments or as variable diameter segments. or deleted from the segment. right-click the segment to change. unrouted. For a fixed diameter. unrouted. Fixed diameter segments. do not change as wires and cables are routed. 2 In the browser or graphics window. deselect the check box and enter a diameter value.

To change the display for a selected segment 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active.Changing Displays of Segments Segments can be displayed as rendered or centerlines. You can also change the display of a single segment by selecting the Display As Rendered option from the Display Settings tool on the Standard toolbar or by right-clicking on a segment and selecting Display As Rendered from the context menu. rendered centerline 5 To change the display setting for all segments. 260 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . 2 In the browser or graphics window. either with the context menu for the segment occurrence or the Segments folder. right-click. The display preference can be set in different ways. while centerline display provides an unobstructed view of the work points and path. you may need to set the Select tool to Select Sketch Features. 3 Right-click and select Harness Properties. and then select Display All As Rendered from the context menu. the Segment Properties dialog box. 4 In the Segment Properties dialog box. Occurrence tab. The occurrence level display settings always override the current display state. the display options can be set for individual segments or for all segments in a selected harness assembly. or the Display Settings tool on the Standard toolbar. select the Segments folder in the browser. select a segment. select the tool for the Centerline display option. Like wires. NOTE To select the segment in the graphics window. Rendered display provides a three-dimensional appearance.

4 Set the segment color. and close the dialog box. These settings are used when creating segments. NOTE The bend radius multiplier must be set for the bend radius check to operate. To set the segment defaults With Harness Assembly1 still active. 5 If appropriate. set a bend radius value. Setting Segment Defaults | 261 . do the following: 1 In the browser. set the distance to offset segment work points from the selected face during selection. and then select Harness Settings from the context menu. 3 Set the diameter behavior.Setting Segment Defaults Several default settings are available for harness segments. 6 Select the display setting. right-click the harness assembly. 2 On the Settings tab of the Harness Settings dialog box. 7 Click OK to save the changes.

262 .

or semiautomatic methods. ■ Overview of routing ■ Manual routes ■ Creating semi-automatic routes ■ Creating automatic routes ■ Unrouting ■ Viewing paths 263 . you learn how to use the different routing and unrouting methods. In this chapter. they are inserted into selected segments using manual.Routing Wires and Cables In This Chapter 13 When wires and cables are routed. automatic. Unrouting wires and cables removes them from the selected segments.

Defining Manual Routes Use the Route tool to manually route individual wires or cables into a single segment. each wire is independent and can take a different path through the assembly. When routing or unrouting you can select the object to use before opening the dialog box. Wires and cables can be routed only into segments that are in the active harness assembly. Wire and cable lengths and segment diameters are also calculated automatically when unrouting or removing wires and cables from segments. Inserts selected wires and cables into continuous segments. All work points on a wire or cable wire are deleted when routed from a pointto-point state.About Routing and Unrouting By default. or placed into segments. Segments can be discontinuous. Automatically inserts all unrouted wires or cables into the segment that is closest to the wire connect points (pins) and also represents the shortest path. or you can select the objects using the dialog box tools. When routing and unrouting individual wires. If a change is made to the routing or unrouting of one cable wire. all associated cable wires also change. 264 | Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables . when wires and cables are routed. Route tool The segments can be discontinuous and can be used for incremental routing to create networks with gaps. When routing and unrouting cables all cable wires that make up the cable must follow the same path. To route wires and cables. the wire and cable lengths and segment diameters are automatically calculated. you can use one of three methods: manual semi-automatic automatic Inserts individual wires and cables into selected segments one at a time.

When you select a single cable wire. Both cable wires are routed at once. it is routed independently of all other wires. all cable wires associated with the same cable are routed and unrouted together. Defining Manual Routes | 265 . segment cable wires 4 Select the Single Segment check box. 2 Select the Route tool from the Cable & Harness panel bar. select the red or black cable wire to route. To route a Belden cable into a single segment 1 Activate Harness Assembly2. and then click OK. routed cable wires NOTE All cable wires are routed/unrouted together and must take the same path (routed through the same segments) in the harness assembly. 5 Select the First Segment button. select the segment in the graphics window as shown above. and the cable lengths and bundle diameters are updated automatically.The workflow for manually routing cables and wires is the same. The difference is that when you select a wire. 3 In the graphics window.

To route a wire into multiple segments 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active. 3 In the Route Wires dialog box. click the wire as shown in the illustration. 4 In the graphics window. In the browser. 266 | Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables . use the Route tool to select one or more wires or cables. this wire is named Wire1. If more than one path exists between the two segments selected. and the first and last segment within the desired network. from shortest to longest.Defining Semi-automatic Routes When creating a semi-automatic route. verify that the Wires button is selected. a dialog box is displayed for you to cycle through the possibilities. Wire1 In the Route Wires dialog box. the Wires button changes from red to white to indicate that the wire selection is complete. The system looks for the shortest continuous path connecting the two segments. you select a wire and route it manually. 2 In the Cable & Harness panel bar. The corresponding paths are highlighted in the graphics window. click the Route tool. Route Wires In this exercise.

The segment diameter and wire length are calculated automatically.5 Click the First Segment button. and the Last Segment button is depressed. 6 In the graphics window. The wire is routed into the main segment and out the branch. and then click the first segment as shown in the following illustration. and then click OK. first segment The First Segment button changes color. branch segment routed wire Defining Semi-automatic Routes | 267 . click the branch segment.

To automatically route all wires and cable wires 1 With Harness Assembly1 still active. select All Unrouted Wires. 268 | Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables . you can route the objects using manual methods.005 meters of one another. and then looks for the shortest path. When automatically routing. they are considered to be the same distance. After finding the shortest path. or you can route selected wires and cables. and the dialog box is closed. the system checks for the harness segment ends closest to each end of the object being routed. the system examines all segments found. or when the same segment point is identified for both the start and endpoints. such as when the endpoints identified are from different harness segments. The dialog box indicates that there are 7 unrouted wires selected for routing. If the harness segment endpoints found are within 0.Defining Automatic Routes You can route all unrouted wires and cable automatically. click the Automatic Route tool. The remaining wires are routed into the segments. Automatic Route tool 2 In the Automatic Route dialog box. the objects are routed. the route fails. In this exercise. If there is no connection between any of the identified start and end segment points. In this case. When the segment ends are identified. you route any remaining unrouted wires and cable wires into the segments. 3 Click OK.

and then select View Path from the context menu. set the Select tool to Select Sketch Features. the segment diameter does not change from the diameter it had with that last object in it. the wires behave as if the segment was deleted. You can select the wire from the graphics window or browser. there are several options for unrouting wires and cables. Unrouting Using a combination of tools on the Unroute Wires dialog box. NOTE To select the wires from the graphics window. select Wire1 as the path to view. When the last object is unrouted from a segment that is set to calculate size from wires (including cable wires). All work points on wires or cable wires are deleted when the wires are unrouted from all segments. right-click. The current segment is not resized when all wires and cables are unrouted at once. The work points remain when a wire or cable wire is unrouted from selected segments only. and return to their point-to-point connection position. The wire stub (the exposed portions of the wires from the end segment to the pin). To view a wire path 1 With Harness Assembly1 still active. To highlight all of the segments a routed object passes through. the path a wire or cable takes is not always easy to see. Unrouting | 269 . You can unroute: ■ ■ ■ Selected wires or cables from all segments (default) Selected wires or cables from selected segments All wires or cables from all segments When wires or cables are unrouted from the specified segments.View Wire and Cable Paths As a result of routing and unrouting wires and cables in a complex assembly. and the path of the segment the wire passes through are highlighted in the graphics window and in the browser. 2 With the wire selected. select View Path from the context menu.

NOTE To select the wires in the graphics window. and then. The Wires button changes color and the Segments button is depressed. select Wire1 as the wire to unroute. set the Select tool to Select Sketch features. To unroute selected wires from selected segments 1 With Harness Assembly1 active.Rather than unroute an object entirely. it is often necessary to unroute it from one or more individual segments. wires are unrouted independent of one another. Wire1 returns to its point-to-point state. In the graphics window. 4 Click the Segments button. and then click Apply. and then unroute all remaining wires. click the Unroute tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar. 5 Click the segment branch. Unroute Wires Individual. 3 Clear the All Segments check box. click the segment closest to connector 360124. In the following exercises you unroute a selected wire. You also unroute a cable. or discrete. unrouted wire 270 | Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables . Unroute tool 2 Verify the All Wires check box is not selected. in the graphics window.

3 Verify the All Wires and All segments check boxes are cleared. black cable wire 5 Click the Segments button. if the Unroute dialog box is not already open. Unrouting | 271 . and then. Both wires in the cable return to their point-to-point state.Unroute Cables To unroute a cable. in the graphics window. 4 Make sure the Wires button is selected. select the black cable wire. and then in the graphics window. The cable wire is labeled as Cable1:1(1) in the browser. you select a single cable wire. click the segment between the two blue connectors (parts 360575:1 and 360575:2). 6 Click Apply. 2 Click the Unroute tool. 1 Ensure the Harness Assembly2 is active. as the cable wire to unroute. and then all cable wires associated to the same cable are unrouted together.

Practice Your Skills Use the skills and tools learned in the previous examples: 1 Reroute the wires and cables you just unrouted. 2 Save your work. 272 | Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables . you unroute the remaining wires. To unroute all wires 1 In the Unroute dialog box. The wires are unrouted and wire lengths update to reflect the change.Unroute All Wires or Cables from All Segments In this exercise. If the dialog box is not still open from the previous exercise. The data files with routed wires and cables are required to create the nailboard in Chapter 16 of this manual. verify that both the All Wires and All Segments check boxes are selected. 2 Select OK. select the Unroute tool.

splices are a virtual representation of the splice location and the wires that are joined together to make a path for electricity to flow. ■ About splices ■ Workflow for splices ■ Creating splices ■ Manipulating splices ■ Controlling length in splices 273 . add properties to the splice or splice pins. In this chapter you learn how to create and manipulate splices. and set embedded length to indicate splice type.Working with Splices In This Chapter 14 In Cable and Harness.

274 | Chapter 14 Working with Splices . Splice the wires.About Splices Each splice contains two pins. If you prefer. you can create the splice on a segment. Splice information is also included in reports and when saving data to the XML format. import wires onto the splice. In the nailboard drawing the splice is represented with a unique color and symbol. it can be included in standard assembly drawings and nailboard drawings. is created with a default size. change. Redefine the splice onto the segment. The embedded length is set on splices or splice pins. add custom properties to the splice. Accept or change the splice RefDes. The defaults for splices are set on the Splice tab of the Harness Settings dialog box. or delete the part number and the embedded length. Splices are typically placed on segments with little or no bending at the splice location. Route the wires. Create a splice offset from a face. and is offset a specified distance from selected face geometry. Optionally. Import the wires onto the connectors. and then route the wires. You can change these settings for the splice occurrence as needed. You can also connect wires to splices manually. It can also be associated to selected geometry. Recommended Workflow ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Activate the harness assembly. Once a splice is positioned in the harness assembly. Accept.

including the segment endpoints and work points Wire stubs (the portion of the wire from the end segment to the pin). double-click Harness Assembly1. 2 Create a Generic 22AWG-GRN wire from U7 Pin 3 on Connector 360575:1 to J12 Pin 2 on LTP:1. unrouted wires Like segments. or dangling wires. Creating Splices | 275 . including wire work points A segment. exposed wire pieces (sections of wires displayed between gaps in segments). sketch points.Creating Splices Use the Create Splice tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar to add a splice to a harness assembly. Insert a Splice In this exercise you create the splice at an arbitrary location. or center points. you can also associate a splice to other model geometry such as a vertices. connector pins. Splice tool Valid geometry for creating a splice includes: ■ ■ ■ ■ An arbitrary point offset from a face A wire. and then add two wires to the splice. You cannot place splices on cable wires. another splice. It is also recommended that you do not place splices at segment junctions. 1 In the browser.

You can accept or change the default RefDes and accept. accept the defaults. or delete the embedded length and part number. 5 In the Create Splice dialog box. wires 4 On the Cable and Harness panel bar. if not already selected.3 Create another Generic 22AWG-GRN wire from U7 Pin 5 on connector 360575:1 to J12 Pin 2 on LTP:1. change. select Edit Offset. NOTE To change the offset right-click again. A line representing the offset distance extends from the splice object. 7 Click in the graphics window to place the splice. 276 | Chapter 14 Working with Splices . The default offset is set on the Splice tab of the Harness Settings dialog box. click the Create Splice tool. 6 Click the Select Location tool. and then enter a value. splice 8 Click Apply. A green circle that represents the splice is attached to the cursor.

Delete the splice. and then select Splice Wire on the context menu. Add or modify properties on the splice occurrence or splice pins. 1 In the browser or graphics window click the splice. right-click. 2 Click Wire2 to splice that wire. place the splice on the wires before redefining the splice onto the segment. Splice Wires or Add Wires to the Splice To visualize the best placement of the splice in the harness. The wire is split and each object gets a unique name. and then select Splice on the context menu. right-click. Modifying Splices | 277 . You cannot change splice pin names. wire 2 with splice 3 Click Wire3. Redefine the splice location.Modifying Splices Once you place the splice. you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ Add wires to the splice manually or by importing a wire list.

You can also redefine a splice on a segment: ■ ■ ■ To a location off of the segment Onto another segment At another location along the same segment 278 | Chapter 14 Working with Splices . because the wires connected to the splice move with the splice.4 Click the splice. Redundant wires (wires that share a common point when spliced) are deleted. including another location along the same wire You cannot redefine the splice to a location off of the wire. you can redefine the splice to a new location. NOTE Redundant wires are only removed when manually splicing wires. 5 Click OK on the confirmation dialog box to remove redundant wires. You can only delete the splice. wire3 and splice Redefine the Splice After visualizing the splice on the wires. You can redefine a splice on a wire: ■ ■ ■ Onto another wire Onto a segment At another location. Importing wires or placing wires on splices using Create Wire or Edit Wire does not remove redundant wires.

2 Click a new location along the same wire. the existing segment is healed and any wires attached to the splice are unrouted. and then select Redefine Splice on the context menu. Any work points on the spliced wires are retained. Segment1 becomes Segment1 and Segment1_1. new location Modifying Splices | 279 .If the new location is on a different wire or segment: ■ ■ ■ ■ The new wire or segment is split. To redefine a splice along the wire or to an arbitrary location 1 Right-click the splice. If the initial location was on a segment. Notice how the wires move with the splice. and then select a new location in the enclosure. new location 3 Right-click the wire again. the wire(s) move with the splice to the new location. and each object gets a unique name. For example. If the initial location was on a wire.

280 | Chapter 14 Working with Splices .4 Use Undo twice to return the splice to the original location. Click directly on the spline at the center of the segment or click a segment work point. In this exercise you redefine the splice onto a segment. redefined splice 3 On the Cable and Harness panel bar. 1 Right-click the splice in the graphics window. and then select Redefine Splice on the context menu. 2 Click the segment to locate the splice. and then route the wires. original location To redefine the splice onto a segment Autodesk recommends that you place splices on segments. click Automatic Route.

The wire is highlighted to and from the splice along with the segments that the wire is routed through.4 Make sure All Unrouted Wires is selected. The wires are routed into the spliced segment and out the branched segment. right click Wire2_1. and then select View Path to make sure the wires were routed as intended. 5 In the browser. path Modifying Splices | 281 . and then click OK.

Control Length for Splices The embedded length property is key for splices. Click OK. and then select Harness Properties to see the Pin Properties dialog box. Notice that there is an embedded length value of 0. Overlapping splices For both splice types. expand the splice to view the splice pins in the hierarchy. and then click OK. 4 Examine the properties. Wires are either soldered or ultrasonically welded together. 2 Examine the properties. thus the embedded length is zero or a negative number. The Splice Properties dialog box is shown. the splice pins are located in the center of the splice. 282 | Chapter 14 Working with Splices . The embedded length value is the amount that the wires overlap. All wire lengths are calculated to the splice pins and the embedded length of the splice is added to the wire length to determine its adjusted length value. When unique properties are needed for the splice occurrence in an assembly you can override the part level property value with an occurrence property value. splices and splice pins contain a set of properties that provide a complete description of the splice. and then select Harness Properties. There are two types of splices: Butt splices A physical object where the wires are inserted into the body of the splice to form the electrical connection. Wires do not overlap. Right-click a splice point. This ensures that the proper wire length is added to each wire connecting to the splice. Splice occurrences inherit the default properties that are set on the Splice tab of the Harness Settings dialog box and the general properties set at the part level. Access Properties for Splices and Splice Pins 1 To access properties for the splice. in the browser or graphics window.Splice Properties Like all other harness objects. 3 In the browser. because it indicates the different splice types. rightclick the splice.

4 Accept the default Type and Value. click the Splice tab. The logical connection of the signal carried by the wires is maintained.To set an embedded length property for a splices 1 Double-click the Harness Assembly1. You can change the embedded length on the splice occurrence. If a segment or wire that has a splice on it is deleted. if needed. the wires heal. 2 Import wires onto the splice. 2 In the Harness Settings dialog box. 3 Under Properties. 7 Click OK to finish. 5 Delete a splice from a wire. Practice Your Skills 1 Create a splice. redundant wires are deleted along with their associated properties. right-click. click the arrow beside Name. and then select Harness Settings. the splice remains. and then select Embedded Length from the list. and then click Apply. 5 Click the Wires/Cables tab. click Add. 3 Manually attach a wire to the splice. the segment heals and all routed wires remain routed. If there are three or more wires. 6 Click the check box to select the objects on which to look for the embedded length property. Search for “length. Splice Properties | 283 . All new splices are created using this default embedded length. control in splices” in the Help index for more information and examples on setting embedded length and negative length conditions. Delete Splices If you delete a splice with two wires attached. If you delete a splice from a segment. 4 Delete a splice from a segment. Make sure both objects are selected.

284 .

■ About reports ■ Understanding the Report Generator dialog box ■ Formatting reports ■ Understanding link types ■ Generating reports 285 . you learn about the Report Generator user interface. In this chapter. and how to format and generate reports. These reports are dependent on specified properties and can be configured to meet your needs.Generating Reports In This Chapter 15 Harness assemblies can be documented in reports.

286 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports . The information that is processed is based on the property set for each harness component.csv files that are created in the Report Generator. Reports can also be added as table annotations in a nailboard drawing. Report output files can be imported into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or similar application.About Generating Reports Several standard report types.cfg) to format and process the data. 5 Select the files to generate. 2 Select the Report tool from the Cable & Harness panel bar. You can also create your own configuration file from a blank file. 3 Specify a configuration file (. bills of material. and one or more reports are displayed in the Report Generator document window for viewing. 6 Generate the reports. You can rename and customize the sample configuration files to produce reports that meet your needs. NOTE The Report Generator can only view report configuration and . Workflow for Harness Reports The following are the basic steps to create and generate a harness report: 1 Activate the harness assembly to report on. 4 Modify the configuration file to meet your needs. A set of sample configuration files is installed with the application. and connector tables. can be run for a harness assembly. the output file is saved to a specified location. When a report is generated. such as wire run lists.

and several standard Windows features. Sends the selected text files to print. Report tool The Report Generator user interface consists of a menu bar. Copy. the text files containing the output from generated reports are displayed. The following tools are available on the Report Generator toolbar: ile tf ile tf file s file s t s xt or file ile p te file xt e re tf x te ad te cf g te se sc it ea e lo Ca Cr Til Ed C N ew x te x xt te te en t ve p O Sa Cu Co py Pa ste Pr t in New text file Open text file Save text file Cut. and document window. and can rename and relocate the output file. and creates a report output file. Sets the files to use for processing reports on the active harness assembly.Using the Report Generator Dialog Box Before you begin processing reports. Edit configuration (. blank text file. Selects the configuration file to edit. To display the Report Generator dialog box.cfg) file Using the Report Generator Dialog Box | 287 . click the Report tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar. Opens an existing text file. and then displays the configuration file dialog box with options to modify the format and specify information to include for the selected file. Cuts. or pastes the selected text. After a report is generated. toolbar. When the dialog box is first displayed. Saves the selected text file using the name and location specified. Also removes reports from the list. explore the tools on the Report Generator dialog box. copies. the document window is empty. The toolbar and menu bar contain features for generating and modifying reports. Paste Print Create report Creates a new.

To create a new configuration file or modify an existing configuration file. Sample . Arranges text files in the document window to display with no overlap. Closes all files displayed in the document window. and to print the column headers and the text displayed in the Info tab. and then save the file using a unique name. select the required configuration file. To view the settings while reading the descriptions.Cascade text files Tile text files Close text files Arranges text files in the document window to overlap slightly. The following are sample files and their output: Parts list report (PartsList.cfg) Lists the electrical parts specifically attached by a wire or cable wire in the harness assembly. 288 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports .cfg files for each of the main report types are provided in the Cable & Harness ➤Samples ➤Report Generator directory where you installed the Autodesk Inventor® Professional software. modify and organize the data to include the information you need. Formatting Reports Each report type requires a configuration (. You can also create a new blank configuration file. use the Edit configuration file tool on the Report Generator toolbar. It is recommended that you use these files whenever possible to reduce input time and errors. The format is set to include a placeholder for repeated part names. and then click each tab.cfg) file to process the information from the harness assembly and create a report. Use Sample Configuration Files The easiest way to create a report is to use one of the sample configuration files installed with the application. use the sample file as a base. If the sample file does not meet your needs. All sample report types are set to print as comma separated files.

Although length is required to total the amount of wire in the harness assembly. but not print. The format is set to sort multiple columns. and none of its contents. The Autodesk Inventor® parts list includes only the harness assembly.txt is used as the default output name. The filter is set to query only the parts with a part number property. and pin name at both ends of each wire.cfg) Outputs the quantity of each part type that is specifically attached by a wire or cable wire in the harness assembly. in the design.cfg) Creates one file for each electrical component or splice with a RefDes value. The table uses several link types to get the RefDes and pin name information for each wire end. To include harness parts in a BOM. The output file lists the pin name. Wire ID. each wire appears on a new line. Wire run list (Wire Run List. The format is set to output a file for each RefDes and <RefDes>. To create a full electrical bill of materials (BOM) for a harness assembly.cfg) Creates a table with information about the physical characteristics of each segment in a harness. The table is set to include. as well as the length of the wire in the specified units. and to use the Part Number to total the number of like objects. the RefDes property. which enables you to include parts such as tiedowns and electrical connectors that may not be in your harness in your BOM. RefDes. including cable wires. The wire lengths include a round-off value that is used before converting the wires to feet. but the pin name is not repeated. If multiple wires or cable wires connect to the same pin. Segment data (SegmentTable.cfg) Outputs a from/to list for each wire. and wire color. add them as virtual components in the Cable and Harness assembly. Formatting Reports | 289 . Connector table (Connector. and wires or cables wires attached to them in the selected harness assembly. The filter is set to exclude objects from the BOM (denoted by a specific property BOM=FALSE name/value pair). Autodesk recommends that you use the Report Generator. It includes the connection. the column is not printed. The enhanced bill of materials functionality in Autodesk Inventor is supported for harness parts. The report also includes a total length calculation for each library wire type used in the harness.Part and wire BOM (Part-Wire-CableBOM. The total amount of each wire and cable is included in the Quantity column.

Info Tab On the Info tab.cfg) file tool. such as a pin or part. when running a report on a different object type. select the file to modify. such as a wire. If an arrow is displayed.Edit Configuration Files To modify an existing configuration file. set the columns and properties to use for parsing the report. The file header often provides a brief description of the report. view and set the information to appear as the file header. Table Tab On the table tab. click the arrow to select from a list. Refines the report output format including sorting. In the Table tab on the Edit Configuration dialog box. Configuration File Options The parameters on each of the four tabs in the Edit Configuration file dialog box are described in this section. and then change the format and other aspects of the report using the configuration file dialog box. such as counting the number of like objects based on a specified property name. Before editing a configuration file. Controls the types of harness components to include in the report. file format. See the Autodesk Inventor® Professional Help for details about key words. 290 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports . and file print options. link types are used to obtain information on an object type. click the Edit configuration (. click on each tab of the dialog box to explore the available options. Sets the columns and information to use for the report. Click the buttons to add and remove columns. Other information such as the name of the project or model used. Key words are used to perform certain functions. Use the scroll bar to view all the information. and a date can also be included. if necessary. The following table shows the link types you can use for the different harness component object types. and click the input boxes to add property values to each field. The following tabs are available: Info Table Filter Format Displays and sets the header information for the configuration file. Click each tab to view the parameters being described.

GETPIN2 GETPINSGETWIRES GETPINSGETWIRESGETPIN2 GETPINSGETWIRESGETPART2 GETCABLES X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X The rows of the table are defined as follows: Column header Link type Sets the text for column headings. GETPART2 GETSEGMENTS GETWIRES GETPINS GETPIN1. “No” means the property is a constant or special keyword. When set to a link type. Specifies whether the data displayed in this column is a harness property. or a keyword. Sets the value to place in the last row. Keywords enable functions within the report generator. Specifies whether to derive a property value from the main object or an associated object. Sets the width of the column.Link Types None Segment Wire X X Pin X X Part X Cable X Cable Wire X Splices X GETPART GETPART1. the property value is derived from an associated object. See the Autodesk Inventor Professional Help for details on keywords. You can enter a property such as Color Style or Gauge. Sets the name of a single property whose value is written to the report. Name Column width Subtotal function Property data Formatting Reports | 291 . Enter any string.

Sets whether to print this column in the report. When the data type is a length type. Valid properties include any property that appears as a column in the Table tab. and determines how to handle them. Sets the property name and value pairs to include or exclude from the report. Valid column numbers are dependent on the columns that appear on the Table tab. the lengths in harness assembly and nailboard could be different than the generated reports. Sort by columns Placeholder 292 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports . Filter Tab The Filter tab options determine the harness objects and property name value pairs used to process data for the report. Specifies a placeholder when blank or repeated values are used consecutively in a single column. Round Up Print units suffix? Print column? Sets whether to print a units suffix in the report. Enter at least one column number. Also specifies the property value used to group and calculate like objects. Specifies. You can specify a property to use as the naming convention for created files. Format Tab On the format tab you set options that fine tune the report output. NOTE It is recommended that you do not adjust the Unit and Round-up settings from the default. Select objects Object Filters Sets one or more harness component objects to include in the report. Autodesk Inventor unit settings are used by default. You set the text or character string to use as a placeholder in the report. in descending order of importance.Units Specifies the units to use for that column. Multiple Files Enables a single report to output multiple files. If adjusted. Values are dependent on the Unit setting. Indicates the round up value used for wire and segment lengths. round-off values are presented in the Round Off Row. columns used to sort the report data. There are several options.

the location of the log file is listed. and you are prompted whether to continue. but a different data type.cfg file and the directory information to the report. Print header. For each property used on an object in a harness assembly. Clear the box to exclude the column headers from the report. Print information Print column headers Placeholder NOTE It is not recommended to enable the Print filter information. and a log file is generated. Clear the box to exclude this information from the report. Generating Reports To generate a report. For example. or Print information options when you create reports for tables on the nailboard drawing since they affect the parsing of the data when the table is created. Writes the name of the . only one data type can be associated with the property name. The consistency check is performed for all properties on all harness objects associated with the selected harness assembly. A data type consistency check is performed as the reports are processed. Generating Reports | 293 . Writes the text in the Info Tab to the report. Clear the box to exclude the Info Tab text from the report. The log file details any properties with conflicting data types. an inconsistency can occur if a connector part with a specific property and data type is placed into a harness assembly that contains a wire or segment with the same property name. Sets a placeholder for repeated names and blank values. and one or more reports are displayed in the Report Generator document window for viewing. If there is a failure in the data type consistency check. The output file is saved to the specified location.There are also several print options listed: Print filter information Print header Writes the options selected in the Filter tab to the report. Includes the column headers as defined on the Table Tab in the report. you select one or more configuration files to use. and then click OK to generate the report.

and then displayed in the Report Generator document window. and then select Open. double-click the output file name in the list. Click Open. 294 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports . select the Create Report tool.csv is added to the list at the same time as the selected configuration file. NOTE If a file by the same name is in the selected directory. Report Generator folder. The report is processed and the output file is generated with the specified name and location. you generate a simple bill of materials report for the parts and wires in the harness design using the sample file Part-Wire-CableBOM. An output file Harness Assembly1_Part_Wire_CableBOM. navigate to the Part_Wire_CableBOM. Before you begin. 5 Click OK to create the report. and then click the Report tool on the Cable & Harness toolbar. click the Add File to List button. 3 In the Create Reports dialog box. 4 To rename the file. The path of the last selected configuration file is used as the default for subsequent file add operations.cfg file in the Samples directory.cfg. It is located in the same directory as the associated harness assembly by default. and then enter Part_WireCable_BOM1. you are prompted to overwrite or enter a new file name before proceeding. To create a BOM for parts and wires in a harness design 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1.Create Part and Wire Bills of Material In this exercise. Report tool 2 In the Report Generator dialog box. verify the harness assembly is saved and fully up to date (Update button is not active).

8 In the Create Reports dialog box. select the Create Reports tool.cfg file in the Samples directory. including link types.10 use link types to get the RefDes and pin name for each wire end. and then do the following: 1 Click the Report tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar. you modify the sample wire run list report to include more information. click Add File to List. Generating Reports | 295 . Before you begin. and then enter Modified at the beginning of the text. 6 Leave the Format settings as they are.cfg file from the Samples directory. if ReportGenerator is not already open. 5 Click the Table tab.cfg and then click Save.Create Wire Run List Reports A wire run list is a from/to list for each wire and cable wire in the design. 9 Click OK to create the report. and then select the items to process for the report. 3 On the Info tab. Name the file Modified_Wire Run List. navigate to the Modified_Wire Run List. 2 Click the Edit a configuration (. and then accept the defaults for all other options. verify the harness assembly is saved and fully up to date (Update button not active). and then select Open. and the wire part number and length information. and then click OK to display the Save As dialog box. 7 On the Report Generator toolbar. NOTE This information is included in the report only if Print header is selected on the Format tab. In this exercise. Verify that Wire and Cable Wire are selected as the object types. Report Generator folder. It typically includes the reference designator and pin name or number for each end of the wire. To modify a wire run list Make sure Harness Assembly1 is still active. click in the input area before the existing text. and then click Open. Scroll to the right and notice how columns 5 . 4 Click the Filter tab. select the Wire Run List.cfg) file tool on the Report Generator toolbar.

To enter data. select All for both the Property Name and Property Value. and then enter the value. The initial default directory must be a common path for all operating systems. 4 Enter the name of the new configuration file as custom_partbom. you create a new. 7 In Object Filters on the same tab. and then click the Report tool. 6 Click the Filter tab. 5 On the Info tab. 296 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports . 8 Click the Table tab. click the arrow and select from the list. 3 Browse to the appropriate file location.Create Custom Reports In this exercise. click in the input box. no quantity. enter Customized Part Bill of Material. and then in Select Objects.cfg and click Open. To create a new custom report 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1.cfg) file tool on the Report Generator toolbar. Insert each column before column 1. If an arrow is displayed. as indicated below. and then click Insert Column to add two columns. custom report by first creating a configuration file from a blank configuration file. 9 Enter the values in the columns. 2 Click the Edit a configuration (. choose Part.

Generating Reports | 297 . Using the skills learned earlier.The first column lists the reference designator for the part. 11 Select the following print options if they are not already selected: Print filter information Print header Print Information Print column headers 12 Click OK to save the new configuration file. Each of the parts in the design display in an individual row. and any property name can be displayed. generate the report using this configuration file to view the resulting output. Each column can be configured. followed by the part number. enter 2 as the first column to sort. Column1 Column header Link type Name Column width Subtotal function Property data? Units Round up Print units suffix? Print column? REFDES NONE REFDES 15 COUNT YES NONE NONE NO YES Column2 PartNumber NONE PARTNUMBER 15 NONE YES DEFAULT NONE YES YES 10 On the Format tab.

298 .

you learn how to create a nailboard drawing. In this chapter. manipulate the harness shape. and add connectors and other key information.Working with the Nailboard and Drawings In This Chapter 16 You can document a harness assembly in a nailboard drawing or a standard Autodesk Inventor® assembly drawing. ■ About the nailboard ■ Nailboard environment ■ Creating a nailboard ■ Manipulating the harness ■ Changing nailboard displays ■ Annotating the nailboard drawing ■ Adding connectors ■ Creating an assembly drawing ■ Printing nailboard and drawings 299 . annotate the drawing with dimensions. You also learn to create a simple assembly drawing with the harness objects represented as centerlines.

For the recommended use model for nailboards. translate to 2D points that can be used to arrange the harness shape. see “nailboard. 2D images of connectors. associative 2D representation of a 3D harness. The relative positions of the work points from 3D to 2D are maintained. cables. Set default display and distribution for cable wire stubs and wire stubs. unless the assembly is set to defer updates. white paper” in the index of the Autodesk Inventor Professional Help. Add other data needed for manufacturing. the drawing often contains annotations such as a bill of materials. You can also document the cable and harness assembly in a standard assembly drawing and either sweep the harness objects or include them as centerlines. segment. Set default display for segments. Along with the 2D view. and other attribute data.About Nailboards and Drawings A nailboard is a 2D flattened representation of the harness assembly that is used in the manufacture of a wire harness or cable. Rearrange the harness. Any changes made to the harness are automatically reflected in the nailboard the next time it is opened within the harness assembly. Nailboard Features With the nailboard tools you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create an accurate. splice. Create 2D views of connectors. and connector properties. In a nailboard all harness wires. Annotate the drawing with pin. wire. including the distance between any of the two points. The work points defined in 3D. and wire and cable wire stubs. and segments are flattened and drawn as straight lines in their original display colors. Add dimensions to actual wire and bundle lengths. pin numbers. dimensions. 300 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . a wire list.

Fixes a point as a pivot point for the purpose of arranging the wires and segments. Click the Nailboard View tool on the Drawing Views panel bar in an open drawing. is not recommended. Fan In Nailboard Environment | 301 . views. the standard Autodesk Inventor drawing annotation. the Nailboard panel bar and browser are displayed and you can begin manipulating and annotating harness data. y n t it y sio En en ispla h c m et w D i ty D e Sk r ut ess t n n e Vi t e I O rn e pe or bl n i v o Fa n a r o R e p r o k Ba s P Ta P H Fa B it Ed The tools on the nailboard panel bar include: Edit Pivot Fan Out Enters edit mode allowing easy access to the nailboard sketch. Equally distributes wire or cable wire stubs about the endpoint of the segment based on the specified angle and sorting direction. Autodesk recommends that you create another view and make annotations as needed until the view contains the entities you require. Open an existing nailboard.Nailboard Environment There are three ways to enter the nailboard environment: ■ ■ ■ Click the Nailboard tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar in an active harness assembly. Using these features. Nailboard tool Nailboard View tool To provide for maximum flexibility. and sketch panel bars are available from the nailboard environment. It is displayed using the characteristics of the longest wire or the segment. In the nailboard environment. Collapses all wires or cable wires onto each other to form one entity that emerges from the endpoint of the segment. however.

Accesses the standard Autodesk Inventor Drawing Manager command within the nailboard environment for placement of connectors.Harness Dimension Like the standard General Dimension tool. the dimension values on the wires and segments are overridden by the adjusted length values from the harness assembly. Removes the specified length from the selected wire or segment to shorten the object to fit in the drawing. however. Inserts a custom table onto the nailboard drawing. Property Display Report Broken Sketch Entity Base View Table The Nailboard Browser The Cable and Harness and Model browsers in the nailboard environment contain some items common to both browsers. Inserts the harness properties onto the nailboard. and some that are specific to the nailboard. Accesses the report generator from within the nailboard for creation of report files that can be used for annotating the drawing. Not available when in nailboard sketch. The following illustration shows the browser objects that are unique to the nailboard: Nailboard Sketch Nailboard tables Model browser Nailboard tables Nailboard browser 302 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings .

cables. and segments are drawn with their original display color. Splices are represented with an unique symbol and color. The title block and border are placed on the nailboard based on the selected template. In this exercise you view the default display settings for the active assembly and create a nailboard drawing. including cable wires Fan state (fan in or fan out) Display behavior for fanned in wire stubs and cable wire stubs Sorting direction and angle for fanned out wire stubs and cable wire stubs Defaults for new nailboards are set using either the Harness Settings or Nailboard View dialog boxes. depending on how you create the nailboard. which means that the harness objects are placed on the drawing even if they exceed the border size. Set Display Behavior Before you create a nailboard you can verify or change the defaults that control: ■ ■ ■ ■ Lines for segments and wires. Wire and cable wire stubs are equally distributed (fanned out) in a clockwise direction about the segment endpoint at a 90 degree angle. You can create a nailboard drawing for each. The Enclosure Assembly contains two harness assemblies. when you create a new nailboard drawing: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The nailboard view (or draft view) is created and placed in the nailboard sketch. No automatic scaling is done. The wires. use the standard Autodesk Inventor Professional Edit command on the draft view to scale the nailboard view. NOTE If needed. The harness is placed in the center of the drawing. Creating a Nailboard | 303 . This causes the nailboard to be a true one-to-one harness drawing.Creating a Nailboard By default.

3 After you review the settings. click OK. select the default template. and then select Finish Sketch. The nailboard drawing view is created and the nailboard sketch is active. 304 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . The harness is placed in the drawing as shown. 4 From the Cable and Harness panel bar. select the Nailboard tool. select Harness Settings from the context menu. 6 Right-click in the graphics window.idw. 7 Save your work using the default file name. right-click Harness Assembly1 in the browser.To create a nailboard for the first harness assembly 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 as the assembly to document.idw. Standard. 5 In the Open template dialog box. 2 To view the default settings. and then click OK. and then click the Nailboard tab. Harness Assembly1.

and then drag the cursor to the location shown in the illustration. 1 Click the harness segment. options are provided to rearrange the harness objects. 3 Click and drag the harness to its original position in the center of the drawing. they can be moved independently. Manipulating the Harness | 305 . The harness is moved and redrawn in the selected location. If more than one harness segment exists in the nailboard sketch. in a nailboard drawing. For example. no pivot points can exist.Manipulating the Harness Although the default arrangement of the harness and harness objects require little manipulation after initial placement. 2 Release the mouse to complete the move. you can move the entire harness and rearrange segments or wire or cable wire stubs to position them for ease in annotating and viewing in the drawing. You can move the harness in the drawing view or the nailboard sketch. Move the Harness You can move the entire harness to a new location on the drawing. To move the harness assembly in the drawing view. NOTE For a move to occur.

5 Click the point at the left end of the segment. and then click and drag the ends of the segments around that pivot point. 2 In the active nailboard drawing sketch. To arrange the harness segments 1 In the Nailboard panel bar.Arrange the Harness Segments To arrange segments use the Pivot tool to fix segment points. you arrange the harness segments in vertical and horizontal directions using grid snap for precision placement. 7 Right-click and select Finish from the context menu to remove the pivot point. and then drag until the segment snaps to the vertical position. pivot point 4 In the graphics window. 306 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . Pivot tool In this exercise. click the Edit tool to return to the sketch. 3 In the graphics window. and then select Enable Snap from the context menu. click the junction point for the harness branch. click the Pivot tool. right-click in the background. segment end point 6 Return the segment to its original position.

Arrange the Wire Stubs In a nailboard drawing you can manually rearrange individual wires and cable wires by dragging them. wire endpoint Manipulating the Harness | 307 . You can also arrange multiple wire stubs automatically using the Fan In and Fan Out tools. you can return to the harness assembly and move the final segment point farther from the connectors. Longer wire stubs are more visible in the drawing. A pivot point is not required when rotating wires about a segment endpoint. 2 Click and drag each of the wire endpoints to change their positions as shown. To manually arrange individual wire stubs 1 Zoom in on the end of the branched segment to see the distribution of the wire stubs. If the wire stubs are important in your nailboard drawings. The drawing updates automatically the next time it is opened or activated for editing. Exposed wires and wires ending on splices cannot be fanned in or out. NOTE The wire stubs in this harness are very short.

3 In the Fan Out Wires dialog box. and then select Fan In/Out ➤ Fan Out.To automatically arrange multiple wire stubs (fan in and fan out) 1 Right-click the segment endpoint or any of the four wire endpoints. and then select Fan Out from the context menu to change the sorting direction or angle between the outermost wires. and then select Fan In/Out ➤ Fan In. The wires are displayed using the color and diameter of the segment and the length of the longest wire. segment endpoint endpoint of longest wire 2 Right-click the segment point or end point of longest wire. NOTE Right-click a wire in the fanned out state. 308 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . click OK.

Changing Nailboard Displays
Once the nailboard is created and the harness is placed, you can change the display for segments, wires, cable wires, wire stubs, and cable wire stubs using the context menu, and tools on the standard toolbar and the Cable and Harness toolbar.

Change Segment and Wire Line Display
By default, nailboard wires and cable wires are set to display as thin lines. Segments are set to display as actual diameter. You can switch the display for an individual object in the nailboard drawing or all harness objects of one type. To change the segment, wire, or cable wire display once the nailboard is created, right-click and use the display options on the context menu. 1 In the active nailboard drawing sketch, select the segment to change. 2 Right-click and clear the Display as Actual Diameter check box. Notice how the segment has changed.

3 Right-click again, and click the Display as Actual Diameter check box to return the display to the actual diameter.

Changing Nailboard Displays

|

309

Change Fan State and Display
You can change the fan state of wire stubs and cable wire stubs using the Fan In and Fan Out tools on the Nailboard toolbar or right-click to use the context menu.
fan out fan in

Fanned out wire stubs are always displayed using the current wire display setting. Once the nailboard is created, you can change the sorting direction and angle using the Fan Out tool on the Nailboard toolbar, or right-click and use the context menu.
clockwise counter clockwise

There are 2 options for displaying wire and cable wire stubs that are fanned in:
■ ■

Display as segment - use the diameter and color of the associated segment and the length of the longest wire. Display as longest wire - use the diameter, color, and length of the longest wire.
display as longest wire

display as segment

310

|

Chapter 16

Working with the Nailboard and Drawings

In this exercise you create a nailboard view of the harness assembly from an open drawing and change the fan state and display behavior. 1 Select File ➤ New to create a drawing. 2 In the Open template dialog box, select the default template, Standard.idw, and then click OK. 3 In the Drawing Views panel bar, click the Nailboard View tool. 4 In the Nailboard View dialog box, ensure the Nailboard View is Harness Assembly 2.iam. 5 Click the Display tab and click the Fan In tool. 6 Under Appearance, click the Display as Longest Wire tool. 7 Click OK to finish creating the nailboard view and close the dialog box. 8 Right-click and select Finish Sketch for a better view of the cable wire stubs.

9 In the Nailboard panel bar, click the Edit tool. 10 In the browser, right-click Harness Assembly2, and select Nailboard Settings. 11 On the Nailboard Settings dialog box, click the Display tab, and then click the Display as Segment tool.

NOTE This is the only way to change the fan in display once the nailboard
drawing is created.

Changing Nailboard Displays

|

311

Annotating the Nailboard Drawing
Add annotations to the nailboard drawing to provide the needed manufacturing information. You can add dimensions and selected properties on the designated harness objects. You can also add tables including information such as a wire run list, or harness bill of materials.

Dimension the Nailboard
Nailboard dimensions are like driven dimensions where the values update when the harness segments and wire lengths update, but they do not affect the harness geometry. Unlike standard Autodesk Inventor dimensions, the nailboard dimension values show an adjusted length. The adjusted length is the actual calculated wire and segment length that factors in such things as service loop, global slack, and embedded length.

NOTE Search for and select “adjusted length” in the Help index to learn more
about adjusting the length in a harness assembly. You can place dimensions between two selected points on segments, wire or cable stubs, or splices. The dimensions can span wires and segments if needed. Dimensions can be moved and deleted in the nailboard sketch, but they cannot be edited. Dimension Styles control the text style, format, and display properties of the dimensions. All nailboard dimensions are aligned and parallel to the selected geometry. When you exit the nailboard sketch, the parentheses are removed from the dimension and automatically retrieved into the view.

312

|

Chapter 16

Working with the Nailboard and Drawings

To add some dimensions to the harness segments 1 From the Nailboard panel bar, select the Harness Dimension tool. 2 In the graphics window, click the point at the right end of the horizontal segment, and then click the segment point at the branch. 3 Drag to display the dimension, and then click to place as shown.

NOTE Your dimensions may differ depending on your placement of the
segment and segment points.

4 Dimension the other two segments as shown, right-click and select Done.

Annotating the Nailboard Drawing

|

313

Add Properties
Use the Property Display tool to view and display harness properties for wires, cable wires, pins, splices, and segments displayed on the drawing. You can select individual or multiple objects for display. To place the properties in the drawing, you select the location for the first item in the selection set. The system automatically places all other properties offset from the associated harness object based on this initial selection. Once placed you can delete them, or move and adjust the displayed properties to their desired position by right-clicking and rotating 90 degrees in the clockwise or counterclockwise directions. You can also edit the text to change the font. If the harness object to which a property is associated is moved, the property is also moved. To add properties to pins, parts, and a selected wire 1 In the graphics window, zoom in on the harness. 2 From the Nailboard panel bar, select the Property Display tool. 3 In the Property Display dialog box under Select Filters, click All Pins. 4 In the Property Name list, select Pin Name. 5 Under Display Options, select Value Only, and then click Apply. 6 In the graphics window a rubberband line appears from the property text box, which is attached to the cursor, to the associated object. Click to place the property as shown.

314

|

Chapter 16

Working with the Nailboard and Drawings

All properties are automatically placed based on this selection.

7 To place the part properties, select All Parts, select RefDes and Part Number, select Value Only, and then click Apply. Use Ctrl + click to select multiple items in the list. 8 In the graphics window, click to place the part properties.

9 To place the splice properties, select All Splices, select RefDes and Value Only, and then click OK.

splice RefDes

10 Use Ctrl + Click to select the LTP, J12 properties and drag them closer to the end of the branched segment.

properties

Annotating the Nailboard Drawing

|

315

When the wire moves. click the Property Display tool. drag the wire to a horizontal position. scroll in the property list to select Wire ID and Wire Name. wire 3 In the dialog box. and then click to place. and then click Apply. 2 In the dialog box. select Object. 4 Click Name and Value. the properties associated to the wire also moves. 316 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . keeping their original offset and relative position. 7 Return the wire to the previous position.To place a property for a single object 1 In the Nailboard panel bar. wire property 6 To see the associativity between the harness objects and the associated properties. 5 Press the spacebar to switch the property to the branch end of the segment. and not on the branch segment where the wire was selected. and then click the wire shown below. In the graphics window. notice that the property appears on the opposite end of the segment.

and changing the order of rows or columns since the data is controlled by the external file. If a report is not generated before entering the nailboard environment. bill of material.Add Tables To add a table with additional manufacturing information you first generate a report with the required information. If changes are made to the external report file while the drawing is open. Once the table is placed. You can also edit the table to change: ■ ■ ■ ■ Cell justification and size Cell and grid line weights and color Title position Text style The data within the table cannot be edited. Typically. Annotating the Nailboard Drawing | 317 . or connector information. you can move or resize the table by dragging the edges. use the Report tool to generate it. you place a cable and harness bill of materials in the nailboard drawing. deleting. this includes inserting. rightclick the table in the browser and select Update to update the table data. The cable and harness bill of materials is unique to the harness assembly and may not contain standard Inventor parts list information. tables include wire run list. Once the report is generated. The location and filename must be the same for the update to work. In this exercise. you use the Table tool to select the report output file and place the table in the drawing.

To add related connectors and place them near appropriate segment ends 1 In the drawing view. and then select Edit. If appropriate. browse to and select the Harness Assembly1_Part_WireCable_BOM1. and then click Open. Adding Connectors You can also add connectors to complete the harness information. select the table in the browser or graphics window. 2 In the Drawing View dialog box. and then click OK. 4 Click in the upper left corner of the drawing to place the table. The default location is: Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Cable & Harness\Sample\Report Generator. 5 To modify the physical characteristics of the table.csv file. 2 From the Nailboard panel bar. 3 Click the arrow to select a scale of 2:1 from the list. 318 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . The default location is: Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\ Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files. right-click in the graphics window. click the Base View tool. right-click. make additional changes to the table. and then select OK. select the Table icon.To add a table to the nailboard drawing 1 If the nailboard sketch is active. and then select Finish Sketch. 3 From the Select table data file to load dialog box. 6 Use the Edit Table dialog box to change the name of the table to Enclosure Harness Assembly BOM.ipt connector. browse to and select the LTP.

6 Save your work.4 In the graphics window. click and drag the connector to the position shown. Adding Connectors | 319 . 5 Repeat the steps to place the other connectors (360575:1 and 360124).

idw.iam. click the Base View tool. 2 In the Open template dialog box. ensure that Enclosure_assembly. 320 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . Standard. cable and harness information is treated like other parts and subassemblies and can be detailed using normal drawing manager methods and tools. 3 In the drawing view. 6 Right-click Harness_Assembly1.iam is selected. The default location is: Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files.Create an Assembly Drawing In a standard assembly drawing. The centerlines for both the wire and segment are displayed. 4 In the Drawing View dialog box. 1 Select File ➤ New to create a drawing. and then click OK. select the default template. 5 In the browser. and then select Include Centerlines ➤ Wires. Harness objects can be swept or recovered into the drawing as centerlines. expand VIEW 1 and Enclosure_assembly.

8 Right-click Harness_Assembly2. 10 Save your work. and then select Include Splices. rightclick the view in the graphics window. To display the portion of the splice that is hidden by other geometry.7 Right-click Harness_Assembly1 again. and then select Include Centerlines ➤ Cables. add dimensions and other annotations. hidden line 9 Optionally. and then select the Hidden Line tool in the Drawing View dialog box. Create an Assembly Drawing | 321 . select Edit View.

1 Click File ➤ Print. Print registration marks on page corners for alignment of printed pages. use the tiling capability to: ■ ■ ■ Print a single drawing across multiple pages. If necessary. set the print range. 3 If the drawing is too large to fit on one sheet. and then change the paper size and orientation. 5 Click OK to print. You can print or plot a single sheet. Include page identifiers that contain the drawing and sheet name and a table cell number to help keep pages in order. or all of the sheets in the active drawing. in the Scale box. you can click Properties to open the Print Setup dialog box. and then select the Tiling Enabled check box. When printing nailboards and other large drawings. and number of copies. Embedded images and shaded views are still printed in color. Refer to Autodesk Inventor Help for details on other printing options.Printing Nailboards and Drawings You print nailboards and standard drawings that include harness assemblies using Autodesk Inventor printing capabilities. 2 In the Print Drawing dialog box. select Model 1:1. NOTE Check the All Colors as Black option to print the drawing in black and white. 322 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . a range of sheets. 4 Click the Preview button to confirm your expected prints. scale.

Move and adjust the table settings. Display additional properties. Change the orientation and font size of existing properties. and then update the table data. Experiment with angle and sorting direction for fanned out wire stubs and cable wire stubs. Update the external report file. and then: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Generate reports and place additional tables. Printing Nailboards and Drawings | 323 .Practice your skills Create a nailboard view from an open drawing.

324 .

Part 3 IDF Translator Part 3 of this manual provides information about the Intermediate Data Format (IDF) translator for the exchange of printed circuit assembly (PCA) data between mechanical design and printed circuit board (PCB) layout in Autodesk Inventor® Professional. 325 .

326 | .

you learn about the IDF. In this chapter. what types of IDF data are supported by the translator. ■ Introduction ■ Supported exchange formats and board items ■ Understanding import IDF options ■ Importing IDF board data ■ Using IDF board data 327 . how to import IDF data using the translator.Using the IDF Translator In This Chapter 17 The Intermediate Data Format (IDF) is an industrystandard specification designed specifically for the exchange of printed circuit assembly (PCA) data between mechanical design and printed circuit board (PCB) layout. and how the data can be used.

About the IDF Translator The Autodesk Inventor® Professional IDF Translator uses the IDF format to read files containing printed circuit assembly data and create an assembly or part file in Autodesk Inventor Professional containing the PCB and all of its components. NOTE The IDF does not provide a full design representation of a PCA. the board appears with basic board and component geometry information. such as drilled holes. Assigned component colors provide a visually correct representation of the PCB. or place the IDF data as a component in an existing assembly. and components based on board side (top. such as full functional or electrical descriptions. The items on the board are summarized so you can import all items or a subset that you select. bottom. The IDF Translator enables the transfer of PCA data between PCB layout and mechanical design within Autodesk Inventor Professional. . when imported as an assembly. Display a summary of board items before importing. Automatically place all or selected board items. keepouts. You can import the data as a new Autodesk Inventor Professional assembly or part file.emn. You can change the colors for the entire board. and components on the PCB.idb) in the Intermediate Data Format (IDF) as new part or assembly files. or as subassemblies in existing assemblies. along with design constraint information. Once the data is imported.bdf. keepouts. ■ ■ ■ NOTE Via keepouts are not grouped. inner). and should not be used as such. When you first open an IDF board file using the translator. other outlines. . general information about the file being opened is displayed. . such as keep in and keep out regions. The browser and BOM are updated with the IDF data. outlines (including cutouts).brd. since they travel through the board. Automatically group outlines. 328 | Chapter 17 Using the IDF Translator . and all or selected components. With the Autodesk Inventor Professional IDF Translator you can: ■ Import industry standard files (. ■ Assigns colors on import for an accurate board representation.

or regions for routing and placing components. Exchanging Data | 329 . Board entity type Outlines: ■ Board and Panel ■ Other ■ Routing ■ Placement Description Each of the four outline types provides a different function. but are not displayed. If multiple sketches exist. and there are multiple occurrences of that part instance for each component. Annotations Notes added in the IDF data are created and stored with the file. . Drilled holes are distinguished from circular cutouts and are placed onto the same sketch as the board outline. The display name for component occurrences is the placement reference designator. When imported as an assembly. all sketches are stored in a part. each component is represented as a part. Specifies an area where a group of related components are to be placed. each instance of a component is represented as a sketch. When imported as an assembly. such as communicating board shape and cutouts.0 and 3. switches.emn. all sketches for each type of keepout are stored in a part. Bottom. and displays Placement) are listed with their package name and part number. The following table summarizes and describes the types of IDF entities supported by the Autodesk Inventor Professional IDF Translator. and PCB design files with the extensions . All routing keepouts on the same side of the board (Top. outlines are represented as sketches. and . . When imported as an assembly.brd. Each component contains placement information that specifies its location on the board. you can expand the part to view them.Exchanging Data The Autodesk Inventor Professional IDF Translator supports IDF versions 2. If multiple placement keepouts exist. outlines are represented in the browser as parts with single or multiple sketches. If a group area exists on both sides of the board. a sketch is created for each one. Only one sketch is created for via keepouts. Expand the part to view the sketches. since only through vias are supported. When imported as a part. Each keepout specifies a region of the board where a type of item is not allowed.0.idb.bdf. When imported as an assembly. Keepouts: ■ Routing ■ Via ■ Placement Group Areas Drilled Holes Components (Component Board components such as connectors. When imported as a part. or Inner) are stored together in a single sketch. Expand the part to view the sketches. a sketch is created for each side.

You can click Cancel to exit the dialog box without importing any data. based on the board name and other existing board information. 330 | Chapter 17 Using the IDF Translator . and a summary of all board items.The entities created by the IDF Translator are not only graphical representations of design entities. Attributes for reference designators defined in the IDF file are stored with the component representation. options for how to create the data. All part files and sketches are named automatically. the IDF data is read into Autodesk Inventor Professional and the Import IDF Options dialog box is displayed. Understanding Import IDF Options Once you select a file to import. Click OK to import all checked items. They are normal Autodesk Inventor Professional parts with additional attributes that are applied to the created sketch. It provides basic information about the board being imported.

To prevent an item from being imported. the IDF Translator provides two ways to import IDF data. Select document type to create Sets the type of document (or file) type to create. the units used. Assembly Part Select to create a new assembly file containing multiple part files that represent the imported data. or as stand-alone parts or assemblies. other outlines. To accommodate these common workflows. To select a new color.General Information Displays the board name. Select items to import Lists the items contained on the board. Importing IDF Board Files In the typical design process. and the IDF Version for the selected board data. You can: ■ ■ Import the data as a new part or assembly file. You can assign a color to the entire board. Importing IDF Board Files | 331 . Place the data as a component in an existing assembly in Autodesk Inventor Professional. height) in the context of an existing assembly. clear the check box before that item. and all or individual components. and then select a color from the palette. Use this list to determine whether to import all items or a selected set. which reduces the number of files to manage. shape. and then the completed board assembly is passed through the IDF to the mechanical designer to verify fit (size. Another common workflow involves the design of PCB boards to be used as standard components in other assemblies. a PCB designer lays out the components on a board. Item color Shows the color for a selected item in the list so you can assign new colors. click the item name in the list. Select to create a single part file for the imported data.

7 To import other outlines. 5 In the Import IDF Options dialog box. .To import IDF data into an existing assembly 1 Open a destination Autodesk Inventor Professional assembly file of your choice. you import a board as a new assembly. 9 Return to the destination assembly to place the component as usual. In this exercise. and then select part or assembly as the type of file to create. The browser and BOM are populated with the IDF data. All items are imported by default. Clear the check mark from the items you do not want to import. 332 | Chapter 17 Using the IDF Translator . 2 Select Place Component from the Assembly panel bar. view the summary data. select IDF Board File (. 3 In the Open dialog box. 6 Select the items to import. .idb). or reference designators in a different color. and then select a color from the palette 8 Click OK to import selected items. and then select the file to import.brd. or click Cancel to exit the dialog without creating any files or importing data. with the IDF board components. click the component name.bdf. 4 Click Open to begin reading IDF data. . components. in Files of type.emn. The assembly or part document for the imported IDF data is displayed.

5 In the Import IDF Options dialog box. 2 In the Open dialog box. 6 Select Assembly as the type of document you want to create. 3 Navigate to the Autodesk Inventor Professional <version>/IDFTranslator/Samples folder. The information is displayed as shown in the following illustration. 7 Review the summary of board items to import to get an idea of the items included on the board.bdf.brd. . The status bar is displayed indicating the progress as files are being read.brd as the file to open.emn. review the general information displayed about the data being imported. The summary of items is displayed. and then select idf. . change the file type to IDF Board File (.idb). as shown in the following illustration: Importing IDF Board Files | 333 .To import an IDF board file as an assembly 1 Select File ➤ Open from the Autodesk Inventor Professional menu. 4 Click Open to start reading data. .

To exit the dialog box without importing any data. and then verify that the assigned item color is red. 10 Select Other Outline so the name is highlighted. 11 Click OK to import the selected data. Colors can be assigned to group components visually or to call attention to a particular item.8 Click the plus (+) sign before the component named Icc32. If multiple other outlines exist. 334 | Chapter 17 Using the IDF Translator .Partnumber:IDT71256s55LB to expand it. To assign a new color. click Cancel. click the arrow beside Item Color and select from the palette. 9 Clear the check box before U1 so that it is not imported. all are displayed in the same color.

The browser and BOM are updated with the IDF information. as shown in the following illustration.iam file with the IDF board components is created.When the selected data is imported. a standard . Importing IDF Board Files | 335 .

For additional practice. 336 | Chapter 17 Using the IDF Translator . and accept the defaults. try importing the same file as a part to see the differences in the browser information. 13 Save the file using File Save. The following illustration shows the results of importing the idf. When imported as an assembly document.brd file in the browser. When imported as a part document. the board components are translated into multiple parts that are contained in the new assembly.12 Look at the browser to see the results of the import. the board components are translated into the sketches and extrusions that make up the part model in a hierarchy. Importing IDF data as a single part simplifies file management and reduces the number of files that must be opened to display an accurate representation of the PCB assembly. Each part file contains the data for one or more component instance.

Using IDF Board Data | 337 . Use 3D measure between board items. new IDF data cannot be imported. presentations. Create drawings. connector locations. Manually define reference designators on individual components and pins. and keepout areas.Using IDF Board Data Once IDF data is imported. and design views. With the PCB data you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify important features of the board including mounting locations. major components. when placed in an existing assembly. assemblies. and subassemblies. NOTE If the Autodesk Inventor Professional IDF Translator is not installed on the system viewing the imported data. you can treat it as you would treat normal Autodesk Inventor Professional parts. There are no other restrictions on interaction with the IDF data. Verify the fit and shape of the board in the context of the assembly. Edit design constraints (keepouts) as 2D sketches.

338 .

Index

3D Move/Rotate tool, 84 3D Orthogonal Route tool, 34, 39, 40, 125 angular positions, 37 arbitrary bends, 39 display options, 36 editing after i-drop, 123 editting fitting orientation, 79 editting fitting orientations, 130 entering precise values, 41 overview, 34 piping elements, 35 rotation snap, 37 tubing elements, 36

A
Active Style tool change styles, 26 Active Styles tool, 13 adaptivity, changing for node points, 129 add-on applications, using tube and pipe, 8 angles, 45-degree, 35 angles, precise values, 41 angular positions 45-degree increments, 38 90-degree increments, 37 any angles, 39 defining, 37 setting precise values, 41 assemblies multiple segments, defining, 247 pins, placing, 185 assembly drawings, 320 associated engagement, 100 associative points for pins, 183

associativity, changing for node points, 129, 136 authoring parts, 95 connection point and connection axis, 99 each connection number, 97 end treatment, 98 engagements, 99 flipping connection axis directions, 99 ISOGEN properties, 101 nominal size for normal parts, 98 number of connections, 97 parameter mapping, 98 parameters, 97 parameters for iParts, 95 parameters for normal parts, 95 Tube & Pipe Authoring tool, 96 type, 97 auto node points, 131, 135 Autodesk Inventor Professional IDF board data, 337 IDF Translator, using, 328 tube and pipe data, 8 Automatic Route tool, 268

B
base fitting, 147 BASE QTY adding to BOM table, 176 adding to parts lists, 174 grouping parts, 175 base views, 161 bend radii, 42 check hose routes, 87 creating custom, 60 Bend Radius Check tool, 87

Index

|

339

bends custom for pipe routes, 54 default radii, 22 setting radii, 42 tube routes, 60 bill of materials adding columns, 176 R9 or current, 156 table in drawings, 176 bills of material parts and wires, 294 parts, wires, and cables, 289 board components, 329, 331 board entities, 329 BOM adding columns, 176 table in drawings, 176 branch segments, 253 browsers Cable and Harness, 201 cable and harness, 196 Content Center dialog box, 92 drawing views, 169 IDF data displays, 336 nailboard, 302 tube and pipe, 6

C
cable and harness browser displays, 201 component properties, 203 drawings, 300 features, 194 interface features, 196 panel bar, 199 Cable and Harness Library tool, 210 cable and wire displays, changing, 242 cable ID naming conventions, 225 Cable Properties dialog box, 241 Custom tab, 241 General tab, 241 Occurrence tab, 241 Wires tab, 241 cable wires adding points, 236 removing, 230 cables deleting, 230 displaying, 242 naming, 225 removing wires, 230 unrouting, 271 centerline displays, 242, 260 centerlines recovery dimensions to, 173 routes, 170

centerlines, include in drawings, 321 Change Fitting Diameter tool, 129 Clockwise option, 310 color settings 3D Orthogonal Route tool displays, 36 IDF data, 331 tube and pipe components, 22 conduit default styles, 22 conduits authoring, 95 connecting, 130 deleting, 130 deleting connections, 146 diameters and lengths, 22 finding in Content Center, 144 i-dropping, 126 i-dropping from Content Center Library, 122 material and standards, 21 moving, 139 removing unwanted, 141 required parameters for authoring, 98 style options, 21 visibility off and on, 159 configuration files, 232 editing, 290 reports, 288 samples, 288 Configure Libraries tool, 93 New Library tool, 93 configuring Content Center Library, 91 Connect Fittings tool, 130, 147 Connection Axis tool, 99 flipping direction, 99 Connection Point tool, 99 connections between fittings and components, 147 connection axis, 99 connection point, 99 deleting, 146 each connection number, 97 editing between fittings and components, 130, 145 end treatment, 98 engagement types, 148 engagements, 99 female, male, 99 flipping directions, 99 gender in female, 99 total number for authoring, 97 trimming and extending pipe ends, 131 connectors pins, 183, 188 reports, 289 Content Center locating consumed parts, 144

340

|

Index

Content Center dialog box browsers, 92 Insert tool, 123 Content Center Library accessing, 91, 93 configuring, 91 creating and attaching libraries, 93 overview, 91 Content Center tool configuring libraries, 91 overview, 90 permissions to edit and publish, 90 Copy Library Wire tool, 214 Counter clockwise option, 310 couplings, default styles, 22 Create, 60 Create Cable tool, 222 Create Harness dialog box, 198 Create Harness tool, 197 Create New Hose dialog box, 72 Create Segment tool, 246 Create Tube and Pipe Runs dialog box, 10, 28 Create Wire tool, 222 creating node points, 50 custom bends, 54 custom styles, 23 Custom tab, 258 customizing part properties, 187, 190 reports, 296 wire properties, 216 cycle, route solutions, 43

D
data cable and harness library, importing and exporting, 216 exchanging, 329 exporting from wire library, 219 wire library file, locating, 208 data (.csv) files formatting, 233 wires, importing, 232 default fittings, restoring, 131 defer updates All Tube & Pipe Objects, 132 for routes and runs, 132 Route Objects Only, 132 Delete Library Wire tool, 215 Delete Route tool, 130 Delete tool, 130 design view representations, 158 associations with drawing views, 159 changing, 159 creating, 158 related to drawing views, 159

Design View Representations tool, 158 detail views, 165 dialog boxes Cable Properties, 241 Create Harness, 198 Create New Hose, 72 Create Tube and Pipe Runs, 10, 28 Edit Hose Length, 85 Harness Settings, 209 Import IDF Options, 330 Pin Properties, 186 Properties, 203 Report Generator, 287 Segment Properties, 258 Styles, Tube and Pipe, 20 Tube & Pipe Authoring, 96 Tube & Pipe Styles, 20, 23 Wire Library, 209 Wire Properties, 240 diameter behaviors, 259 dimensions drawing dimensions, 172 drawing views, 172 model dimensions, 172 route centerline recovery, 170 direction axes piping routes, 35 tubing routes, 36 disjoint routes, 133 Display as longest wire option, 310 Display as segment option, 310 display settings routes and runs, 132 Display Settings tool, 13 display tools, cable and harness, 196 Display/Update Settings tool, 132 displays 3D Orthogonal Route tool, 36 segments, 260 distances, precise values, 41 documenting base views, 161 bill of materials (BOM) table, 174 creating design view representations, 158 detail view, 165 mapping design view representation, 159 parts lists, 174 projected views, 164 route centerline recovery, 170 routes and runs, 156 workflow, 157 Drawing Annotation panel bar, 172 drawing templates, 157 drawing views addin g dimensions, 172 base views, 161 bill of materials (BOM) table, 174

Index

|

341

drawing views (continued) browser, 169 creating, 160 detail views, 165 mapping design view representation, 159 overview, 156 parts lists, 174 projected views, 164 route centerline recovery, 170 templates, 157 visibility off and on, 159 workflow, 157 Drawing Views panel bar, 160 drawings IDF data, 337 wire harness, 300 drawings, include centerlines, 321 drawings, include splices, 321 drawings, print, 322 drilled holes board entity, 329

exercises backing up tutorial files, 9, 180 prerequisites, 9, 180 Export Wire Library tool, 219

F
Fan, 310 Fan In tool, 310 Fan Out tool, 310 features, cable and harness, 194 female connectors, 99 files IDF, importing, 331 wire library, locating, 208 wire_library.iwl file, 208 files, backing up for exercises, 9, 180 files, printing, 322 Filter tab, 292 Find in Content Center tool, 125, 144 fittings authoring, 95 changing diameters, 129 changing nominal diameters, 77 connecting to base components, 147 connecting tool, 130 default styles, 22 defaults, restoring, 131 delete, 136 deleting, 130, 150 deleting connections, 146 editing connections, 145 editing flexible hose styles, 86 editing in routes, 141 editing orientations, 130, 142 editing positions, 142 editting connections, 130 end fitting, 66 finding in Content Center, 144 i-dropping into tube and pipe assemblies, 122 ISOGEN properties for authoring, 101 material and standards, 21 moving and rotating, 129 off and on, 130 removing extra, 141 replacing, 144 replacing using library items, 125 required parameters for authoring, 98 restoring defaults, 143 start fitting, 66 style options, 21 turning off, 144 visibility off and on, 159 fittings, inserted from project work space, 124 fixed engagement, 100

E
Edit Configuration File dialog box, 290 Edit Configuration File tool, 290 Edit Fitting Orientation tool, 130 Edit Fittings Connections tool, 130 Edit Hose Length dialog box, 85 Edit Library Wire tool, 214 Edit Offset tool, 80, 84 Edit Position tool, 142 editing after replacing, 125 editing routes and runs options, 129 overview, 128 elbows, default styles, 22 electrical parts, 182 modifying, 189 placing, 190 placing pins, 183 workflows, 182 end fittings, 66 workflow, 67 engagements, 99 maximum engagement position (MaxEP), 99 minimum engagement position (MinEP), 99 setting, 101, 105 trimming and extending pipe ends, 131 types, 100 types for fitting connections, 148 Enter Route Environment tool, 13 environments nailboard, 301 tube and pipe, 5

342

|

Index

fixed node points auto node points, 131 fixed norminal size authoring normal parts, 98 flexible hoses adding and suppressing hose fittings, 87 adjusting hose length, 85 changing nominal diameters, 77 checking bend radius, 87 creating routes, 71 defining hose round up values, 68 deleting routes, 78 edit start and end fittings, 86 editing, 82 editing hose length, 131 editing hose nodes, 83 i-dropping fittings to start, 79 inserting nodes, 131 moving nodes, 131 ND in Styles, editing, 77 populating, 76 replacing hose fittings, 86 styles, 22, 68 Use Subassembly option, 69 using subassembly, 22 valid connections, 71 with both fittings, 70, 72 with no fittings, 70 with start fitting only, 70 workflow, 67 flexible hoses, overview, 66 Format tab, 292 free fitting, 147

hose nodes adding new, 83 deleting, 84 moving and rotating, 84 redefining, 84 hose round up value, 68 hose routes adding and suppressing hose fittings, 87 adjusting hose length, 85 changing nominal diameters, 77 checking bend radius, 87 creating, 71 defining hose round up values, 68 definition, 66 deleting routes, 78 edit hose length, 131 edit start and end fittings, 86 editing, 82 editing hose nodes, 83 i-dropping fittings to start, 79 inserting nodes, 131 moving nodes, 131 populating, 76 replacing hose fittings, 86 styles, 22 Use Subassembly option, 69 using subassembly, 22 valid connections, 71 with both fittings, 70, 72 with no fittings, 70 with start fitting only, 70 workflow, 67

G
group areas board entity, 329

I
IDF (Intermediate Data Format) in Autodesk Inventor Professional, 337 IDF data annotations for IDF data, 329 browser representations, 336 drawings and presentations, 337 import options, 330 importing as assemblies, 332 importing as parts, 331 setting colors, 331 IDF translator (Intermediate Data Format), 327, 328 supported IDF versions, 329 i-drop conduits, 126 fittings, 122 saving custom parts, 126 i-drop fittings, 79 Import IDF Options dialog box, 330 Import Wire Library tool, 218 Import Wire List tool, 232, 234

H
harness assemblies, 198 nesting, 197 segment diameter settings, 259 workflows, 182 harness component properties, customizing, 203 harness components demoting and promoting, 201 occurrence properties, 204 placing in assemblies, 196 properties, 203 Harness Part Features panel bar, 183, 196 Harness Properties tool, 183, 186 Harness Settings dialog box File Locations tab, 209 Hose Length tool, 85, 131

Index

|

343

include centerlines in drawings, 321 include splices in drawings, 321 Info tab, 290 Insert Node tool, 83, 131 Insert tool, 79, 123 inserting node points, 135 Intermediate Data Format (IDF) translator, 328 intermediate node points, 34 iPart table, mapping parameters for authoring, 98 iParts authoring, 95 ISOGEN properties, 101 setting for authored fittings, 107

minimum segment length, 139 Move Node tool, 131 Move Segment tool, 131

N
nailboard environment, 301 Nailboard panel bar, 196 Nailboard tool, 301 Nailboard View tool, 196, 301 nailboard, print, 322 nailboards, 303 browser, 302 New Library tool, 93 New Library Wire tool, 213 New Route tool, 32 flexible hoses, 71 node points, 34 adding new hose ndoes, 83 adding to finished, 133 auto routing, 131 changing associativity, 136 changing to auto route, 135 context menu options, 129 delete, 136 deleting, 130 deleting hose nodes, 84 editing in routes, 133 editing positions, 142 fixed, 49 inserting, 135 inserting nodes, 131 moving and rotating hose nodes, 84 moving nodes, 131 offset, 80 redefining hose nodes, 84 removing unwanted, 141 restoring to coupling or elbows, 143 setting to update dynamically, 135 using point snap, 40 non associative points for pins, 183 normal parts authoring, 95 notes for IDF data, 329

K
keepouts board entity, 329 key words, 290

L
libraries accessing, 91, 93 authoring iParts and normal parts, 95 configuring, 91 creating and attaching, 93 i-drop library items, 122 overview, 91 library wires definitions, 212, 215 editing, 214 importing and exporting, 216 link types, 290

M
male connectors, 99 manual node points changing to auto route, 135 delete, 136 manual routes, 48 material adding to BOM table, 176 adding to parts lists, 174 grouping parts, 175 materials fittings and conduits, 21 Max Engagement tool, 100 maximum engagement position (MaxEP), 99 setting, 105 maximum segment length, 139 minimum bend radius checking hose routes, 87 minimum engagement position (MinEP), 99 setting, 105

O
occurrence properties, 204 OD/ID diameter type, 22 offset routes, 55 orientation for placed fittings, editing, 130 outlines board entity, 329 overviews 3D Orthogonal Route tool, 34 editing routes and runs, 128 fitting connections, 145 flexible hoses, 66

344

|

Index

overviews (continued) routes and runs, 32 styles, 23 Tube and Pipe, 4 tube and pipe styles, 18

P
panel bars Cable and Harness, 196, 199 Drawing Annotation, 172 Drawing Views, 160 Route, 32, 129 parts customizing properties, 190 electrical, creating, 182 electrical, placing, 190 harness, demoting and promoting, 201 pinned, modifying and deleting, 189 properties, 187 parts lists adding columns, 174 grouping parts, 175 PCB file extensions, 329 Pin Properties dialog box, 186 pins deleting, 189 modifying, 189 placing, 188 placing in assemblies, 185 pipe length adding to BOM table, 176 adding to parts lists, 174 grouping parts, 175 pipe routes, 44, 48 with custom bends, 54 pipes deleting, 150 piping component color, 22 Place Component tool, 332 Place Fitting tool, 124 Place Pin tool, 183 placeholder reference designators, 188 Point Snap tool, 40, 50 Select Other Snap tool, 52 points adding to wires and cable wires, 236 moving on wires, 237 moving segments, 254 positions, editing, 130 snapping onto 3D Orthogonal Route tool, 40 Populate, 58 Populate Route tool, 58 precise values, setting, 41 prerequisites for exercises, 9, 180 presentations, IDF data, 337

preview display settings, 13 print, nailboards and drawings, 322 projected views, 164 properties cable occurrences, 241 custom harness, 203 customizing, 187 harness components, 203 library wire definitions, 215 library-level, 241 occurrence, 204 parts, 187 segments, 258 wire occurrences, 240 Properties dialog box, 203

R
radius arrows angles free rotation, 36 ratio engagement, 100 recovering route centerlines, 170 dimensions to, 173 Redefine tool, 84 reference designators, 187 assigning occurrences, 204 placeholders, 188 rendered displays, 242, 260 Replace All tool, 125 Replace tool, 125 Report Generator dialog box, 287 Report Generator toolbar, 287 Report tool, 287 reports, 286 configuration files, 288, 290 connector tables, 289 customizing, 296 formatting, 288 generating, 285, 293 part and wire bills of material, 289, 294 parts lists, 288 print options, 293 wire run lists, 289, 295 workflows, 286 repositioning route segments, 139 representations, 158 Restore Fitting tool, 143 restoring default fittings, 131 rotation arrows piping routes, 35 tubing routes, 36 route direction options, 21 route node points deleting, 150 Route panel bar, 32, 129 Route tool, 32, 131, 264

Index

|

345

131 tube. 257 displaying. inserting. 129 creating design view representations. 22 display and update settings. 259 unrouting wires. 10 browser representations. 139 flexible hoses. 150. 44. 133 assembly. 33 diameters. 259 adding branches. 268 automatically updating node points. 247 defining. 264 setting diameters. 139 Select Other Snap tool. 170 removing unwanted segments. 40 creating node points. 60 unpopulated. 246. 135 inserting nodes. 158 creating manually. 258 segment work points. 133 editing overview. 76 recovering centerlines. 132 defining angular positions. 32. 132 display settings. 128 editing segments. 52 sorting direction. 136 design guidelines. 230 splices. 24 tubing with bends. 66 workflow. moving. 7 changing active styles. 67 start points for routes. 131 manual. 246. 135 route centerline recovery. 26 creating automatically. 68 rigid pipe with fittings. 22 inserting node points. 7 changing active styles. 170 offset. 43 automatic. 27 346 | Index . 153 Delete Run tool. 32 active styles. 39 deleting. 54 populating hose routes. 13 documenting. 156 visibility off and on. 170 subassemblies. 22 single segments. 130. 22 moving nodes. 25 routes. 27 adding to finished. 11 inserting node points. 174 grouping parts. 266 new in drawing views. 131 moving segments. 135 browser representations. documenting. 260 changing offsets. 20 flexible hose. 26 context menu options. 33. 37. defining. 144 visibility off and on. 176 adding to parts lists. 48 defer updates. 264 start points. 23 styles. 264 maximum segment. 131 multiple segments. 141 editing node points. 257 deleting work points. 7 S Segment Properties dialog box. 253 changing displays. 130 design guidelines. 175 Style list Tube and Pipe. 310 spare wires connecting. 44 STOCK NUMBER adding to BOM table. 158 deleting. 80 pipe. 321 start fittings. 128 individual. 159 workflows. 254 removing unwanted. 55. 12 turning off fittings.route types. 200 modifying. 33 display and update settings. 269 segments. 156 editing fittings. 141 semi-automatic. 44 trimming and extending. 78 deleting node points. 66 incremental segment size. 247 deleting. 133 alternate solutions. 44 creating design view representations. 256 segments. 159 runs. include in drawings. 132 display settings. 266 setting. 153 deleting hose routes. 264 active styles. 27 adding to finished. 156 editing overview. 23 adding to templates. 150. 196. 52 snapping points. 13 documenting. 50 Select Other Snap tool. 38. 33. 141 routing wires through. 48 pipe with custom bends. 22 minimum segment.

131 Move Segment. 164 Redefine. 20 rigid pipe with fittings. 268 Base View. 21 defining hose round up values. 123 Insert Node. 68 deleting. 328 Trim/Extend Pipe tool. 98 type. 20 Styles Editor tool defining tube and pipe styles. 83. 97 parameter mapping. 131 Import Wire Library. 174 Configure Libraries. 332 Place Fitting. 68 modifying. 21 Index | 347 . 130 Edit Library Wire. 101 nominal size for normal parts. 147 Connection Axis. 18 Suppress Fitting option. 132 displaying wires. 214 Create Harness. 26 Automatic Route. 130 Edit Fitting Orientation. 131 Tube & Pipe Authoring dialog box. 130 Delete Run. 32 New Route tool for flexible hose routes.styles (continued) authoring and publishing. 287 Restore Fitting. 18 tubing with bends. 100 Move Node. 26 flexible hose. 68 flexible hoses. 80. 84 3D Orthogonal Route. 27 custom. 125. 210 Change Fitting Diameter. 144 Hose Length. 264 Select Other Snap. 214 Edit Offset. 287 Report Generator. 25 Styles dialog box Tube and Pipe. 84 Edit Position. 22 Fittings tab. 143 Route. 124 Point Snap. 85. 93 New Library Wire. 22 flexible hose. 87 Cable and Harness Library. 98 number of connections. 96 authoring parameters. 208 translator. 131. 219 Find in Content Center. 52 Trim/Extend Pipe. 84 Replace. 213 New Route. 25 options. 131 Tube & Pipe Authoring. 200 Edit Fitting Connections. 27 tools 3D Move/Rotate. 125 Replace All. 24 structuring hose routes. 99 Content Center. 197 Delete. 97 connection point and axis. 22 Suppress Fitting option for flexible hose. 93 Connect Fittings. 68 General tab. 90 Copy Library Wire. 58 Projected View. 174 Place Component. 130. 96 Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box active style. 130 Design View Representations. 158 Detail View. 23 Display tab. 98 engagements. 99 each connection number. 71 Parts List. 218 Insert. 165 Display/Update Settings. 142 Export Wire Library. 161 Bend Radius Check. 130 Delete Library Wire. 34 Active Style. 87 T Table tab. 32. 99 ISOGEN properties. 96 Tube & Pipe Styles. 19 wire library. 40 Populate Route. 70 creating new routes and runs. 215 Delete Route. 23 changing active. 26 creating hose routes. 87 tube and pipe. 290 templates drawing views. tube and pipe. 157 tune and pipe runs assembly. 129 Column Chooser. 23 defining elbows. 131 New Library. 97 Tube & Pipe Authoring tool. 20 Library Browser. 99 Connection Point. Intermediate Data Format (IDF). 125 Report. 131 Max Engagement. 22 route direction. 97 end treatment.

229 displaying. 242 wire data libraries. 69 W wire and cable displays.Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box (continued) Rules tab. 257 moving segments. 222 automatic routing. 4. 132 Use Subassembly option creating hose routes. 12 tube and pipe styles overview. 122 tube and pipe data using with add-on applications. 196 creating hose routes. 208 viewing files. 237 replacing. 270. 174 creating design view representations. 240 Occurrence tab. 239 moving. 212. 200. creating. 158 documenting. 150 editing overiew. 232 importing. 208 wire ID naming conventions. 232 library definitions. 19 tube and pipe assemblies. 12 Tube and Pipe Runs subassembly. 269 update settings routes and runs. 169 inserting fittings and conduit parts. 234 Wire Properties dialog box. 9 workflows. 272 Wires tab. 258 work points grounded and ungrounded. 263. 215 library files. 266 moving. 222 properties. 227 moving points. 60 chaning bend radius. 237 naming. 237 redefining. 254 harness segments. 212 locating. 216 definitions. 237 wires adding points. 246 workflows assembly components. 270 unrouting all. 67 documenting routes and runs. 182 tube and pipe. 240 wire work points adding. 254 segments. 7 348 | Index . 240 General tab. 8 tube and pipe runs active styles. 196. 27 assemblies. customizing. 6 context menu options. 271 Unroute Wires dialog box. 150 moving couplings. 156 drawing view browser. 18 tube routes.. 18 using with add-on applications. 216 redefining. 209 data. 157 parts. 152 tutorial files locating. 240 From/To tab. 129 overview. 269. 10 browser. 5 routes and runs overview. 22 Size tab. 209 Wire Library dialog box. 264. 236 assemblies. 7 tube and pipe assemblies bil of materials (BOM table). importing. 10 subassemblies. 184 U Unroute tool. 22 Style list. inserting in. 32 styles. 231 routing. 289. 208 lists. 72 hose route structure. 239 deleting. 264 run lists. 214. 268 delete points. importing and exporting. 26 Tube & Pipe Styles tool. 209 wire lists. 236 deleting. 234 manual routes. locating. 222 wire libraries. 240 Custom tab. 295 unrouting. creating electrical. 242 importing.